Operator’s Manual Operator’s Manual

1780R-Series 1780R-Series Video Measurement Set Video Measurement Set 070-6890-08 070-6890-08

This document supports firmware version 1.10 to This document supports firmware version 1.10 to 1.16. 1.16. Copyright © Tektronix, Inc. All rights reserved. Copyright © Tektronix, Inc. All rights reserved.

Tektronix products are covered by U.S. and foreign patents, issued and Tektronix products are covered by U.S. and foreign patents, issued and pending. Information in this publication supercedes that in all previously pending. Information in this publication supercedes that in all previously published material. Specifications and price change privileges reserved. published material. Specifications and price change privileges reserved.

Tektronix, Inc., P.O. Box 1000, Wilsonville, OR 97070–1000 Tektronix, Inc., P.O. Box 1000, Wilsonville, OR 97070–1000

TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix, Inc. TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix, Inc.

WARRANTY WARRANTY

Tektronix warrants that the products that it manufactures and sells will be free from defects Tektronix warrants that the products that it manufactures and sells will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of three (3) years from the date of shipment. If a in materials and workmanship for a period of three (3) years from the date of shipment. If a product proves defective during this warranty period, Tektronix, at its option, either will product proves defective during this warranty period, Tektronix, at its option, either will repair the defective product without charge for parts and labor, or will provide a repair the defective product without charge for parts and labor, or will provide a replacement in exchange for the defective product. replacement in exchange for the defective product.

In order to obtain service under this warranty, Customer must notify Tektronix of the In order to obtain service under this warranty, Customer must notify Tektronix of the defect before the expiration of the warranty period and make suitable arrangements for the defect before the expiration of the warranty period and make suitable arrangements for the performance of service. Customer shall be responsible for packaging and shipping the performance of service. Customer shall be responsible for packaging and shipping the defective product to the service center designated by Tektronix, with shipping charges defective product to the service center designated by Tektronix, with shipping charges prepaid. Tektronix shall pay for the return of the product to Customer if the shipment is to prepaid. Tektronix shall pay for the return of the product to Customer if the shipment is to a location within the country in which the Tektronix service center is located. Customer a location within the country in which the Tektronix service center is located. Customer shall be responsible for paying all shipping charges, duties, taxes, and any other charges for shall be responsible for paying all shipping charges, duties, taxes, and any other charges for products returned to any other locations. products returned to any other locations.

This warranty shall not apply to any defect, failure or damage caused by improper use or This warranty shall not apply to any defect, failure or damage caused by improper use or improper or inadequate maintenance and care. Tektronix shall not be obligated to furnish improper or inadequate maintenance and care. Tektronix shall not be obligated to furnish service under this warranty a) to repair damage resulting from attempts by personnel other service under this warranty a) to repair damage resulting from attempts by personnel other than Tektronix representatives to install, repair or service the product; b) to repair damage than Tektronix representatives to install, repair or service the product; b) to repair damage resulting from improper use or connection to incompatible equipment; c) to repair any resulting from improper use or connection to incompatible equipment; c) to repair any damage or malfunction caused by the use of non-Tektronix supplies; or d) to service a damage or malfunction caused by the use of non-Tektronix supplies; or d) to service a product that has been modified or integrated with other products when the effect of such product that has been modified or integrated with other products when the effect of such modification or integration increases the time or difficulty of servicing the product. modification or integration increases the time or difficulty of servicing the product.

THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. TEKTRONIX’ RESPONSIBILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. TEKTRONIX’ RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE SOLE AND TO REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR BREACH OF EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY. TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS WILL NOT BE LIABLE THIS WARRANTY. TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER TEKTRONIX OR THE VENDOR DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER TEKTRONIX OR THE VENDOR HAS ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. HAS ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Contacting Tektronix Contacting Tektronix

Product For questions about using Tektronix measurement Product For questions about using Tektronix measurement Support products, call toll free in North America: Support products, call toll free in North America: 1-800-TEK-WIDE (1-800-835-9433 ext. 2400) 1-800-TEK-WIDE (1-800-835-9433 ext. 2400) 6:00 a.m. – 5:00 p.m. Pacific time 6:00 a.m. – 5:00 p.m. Pacific time Or contact us by e-mail: Or contact us by e-mail: [email protected] [email protected] For product support outside of North America, For product support outside of North America, contact your local Tektronix distributor or sales contact your local Tektronix distributor or sales office. office. Service Tektronix offers extended warranty and calibration Service Tektronix offers extended warranty and calibration Support programs as options on many products. Contact Support programs as options on many products. Contact your local Tektronix distributor or sales office. your local Tektronix distributor or sales office. For a listing of worldwide service centers, visit our For a listing of worldwide service centers, visit our web site. web site. For other In North America: For other In North America: information 1-800-TEK-WIDE (1-800-835-9433) information 1-800-TEK-WIDE (1-800-835-9433) An operator will direct your call. An operator will direct your call. To write us Tektronix, Inc. To write us Tektronix, Inc. P.O. Box 1000 P.O. Box 1000 Wilsonville, OR 97070-1000 Wilsonville, OR 97070-1000 USA USA

Website Tektronix.com Website Tektronix.com

Table of Contents Table of Contents

General Safety Summary...... xi General Safety Summary...... xi Getting Started Getting Started

Documentation Overview...... 1–1 Documentation Overview...... 1–1 Operator’s Manual...... 1–1 Operator’s Manual...... 1–1 Service Manual...... 1–1 Service Manual...... 1–1 Documentation Conventions...... 1–2 Documentation Conventions...... 1–2 Who Should Use This Operator’s Manual...... 1–2 Who Should Use This Operator’s Manual...... 1–2 1780R-Series Product Overview...... 1–2 1780R-Series Product Overview...... 1–2 New Capabilities...... 1–3 New Capabilities...... 1–3 Touch Screen...... 1–3 Touch Screen...... 1–3 1780R-Series Package...... 1–4 1780R-Series Package...... 1–4 Mechanical Installation...... 1–4 Mechanical Installation...... 1–4 Rack-Mounting...... 1–4 Rack-Mounting...... 1–4 Options...... 1–9 Options...... 1–9 Standard Accessories...... 1–9 Standard Accessories...... 1–9 Optional Accessories...... 1–10 Optional Accessories...... 1–10 Connectors, Controls, Indicators Connectors, Controls, Indicators

Switches...... 2–1 Switches...... 2–1 Companion Switches...... 2–1 Companion Switches...... 2–1 Controls...... 2–1 Controls...... 2–1 LEDs...... 2–1 LEDs...... 2–1 Audio Feedback (Beep)...... 2–2 Audio Feedback (Beep)...... 2–2 A Beep Sounds When:...... 2–2 A Beep Sounds When:...... 2–2 Disable the Beep...... 2–2 Disable the Beep...... 2–2 A “Click” Occurs When:...... 2–2 A “Click” Occurs When:...... 2–2 Touch Screen...... 2–2 Touch Screen...... 2–2 Front-Panel Controls...... 2–3 Front-Panel Controls...... 2–3

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual i 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual i Table of Contents Table of Contents

Power...... 2–3 Power...... 2–3 CRT Controls...... 2–3 CRT Controls...... 2–3 Precision Measurement (Large Knob)...... 2–5 Precision Measurement (Large Knob)...... 2–5 Menu Access Switches...... 2–7 Menu Access Switches...... 2–7 Probe...... 2–8 Probe...... 2–8 Display Mode...... 2–9 Display Mode...... 2–9 Ref...... 2–12 Ref...... 2–12 Wfm Horizontal...... 2–12 Wfm Horizontal...... 2–12 Magnifier...... 2–12 Magnifier...... 2–12 Gain...... 2–13 Gain...... 2–13 Filter...... 2–14 Filter...... 2–14 Input...... 2–15 Input...... 2–15 Rear Panel Connectors...... 2–16 Rear Panel Connectors...... 2–16 Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

Large Knob And Associated Switches...... 3–1 Large Knob And Associated Switches...... 3–1 Timing Cursors...... 3–1 Timing Cursors...... 3–1 Voltage Cursors...... 3–2 Voltage Cursors...... 3–2 Line Select...... 3–3 Line Select...... 3–3 Phase Shift...... 3–5 Phase Shift...... 3–5 Reference Set...... 3–5 Reference Set...... 3–5 Knob...... 3–6 Knob...... 3–6 < > Switches...... 3–6 < > Switches...... 3–6 Graticules...... 3–6 Graticules...... 3–6 Scale Illumination for Vector and Waveform Graticules. . . 3–6 Scale Illumination for Vector and Waveform Graticules. . . 3–6 Using The Vector Graticule...... 3–6 Using The Vector Graticule...... 3–6 Using The Waveform Graticule...... 3–12 Using The Waveform Graticule...... 3–12 Remote Operation...... 3–15 Remote Operation...... 3–15 REMOTE Connector...... 3–15 REMOTE Connector...... 3–15 Remote Operation...... 3–15 Remote Operation...... 3–15 Serial Communications Interface...... 3–18 Serial Communications Interface...... 3–18 Serial Interface Connector...... 3–18 Serial Interface Connector...... 3–18 Building a Wiring Converter...... 3–18 Building a Wiring Converter...... 3–18 Serial Remote Information...... 3–19 Serial Remote Information...... 3–19 SCH Display...... 3–21 SCH Display...... 3–21 SCH Phase Measurement Procedure...... 3–22 SCH Phase Measurement Procedure...... 3–22

ii 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual ii 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Table of Contents Table of Contents

Parade Operation...... 3–23 Parade Operation...... 3–23 Two Line or Field Parade...... 3–23 Two Line or Field Parade...... 3–23 Three Line Display...... 3–23 Three Line Display...... 3–23 Offset Menu...... 3–23 Offset Menu...... 3–23 DC Level Measurements...... 3–24 DC Level Measurements...... 3–24 DC Level Measurement Procedure...... 3–25 DC Level Measurement Procedure...... 3–25 Overlay Operation...... 3–26 Overlay Operation...... 3–26 Overlaid Displays...... 3–26 Overlaid Displays...... 3–26 Offset Menu...... 3–26 Offset Menu...... 3–26 WFM + CAL...... 3–27 WFM + CAL...... 3–27 Enter WFM+CAL Mode...... 3–27 Enter WFM+CAL Mode...... 3–27 General WFM+CAL Information...... 3–27 General WFM+CAL Information...... 3–27 Menu Information...... 3–31 Menu Information...... 3–31 Menu Documentation Overview...... 3–31 Menu Documentation Overview...... 3–31 Menu Access...... 3–32 Menu Access...... 3–32 Touch Screen...... 3–32 Touch Screen...... 3–32 Password Menu...... 3–34 Password Menu...... 3–34 Enable / Disable the Password...... 3–34 Enable / Disable the Password...... 3–34 Define the Password...... 3–34 Define the Password...... 3–34 Change the Password...... 3–35 Change the Password...... 3–35 Use the Password...... 3–35 Use the Password...... 3–35 Incorrect Password...... 3–35 Incorrect Password...... 3–35 Preset Menu...... 3–36 Preset Menu...... 3–36 Recall...... 3–36 Recall...... 3–36 Recover...... 3–38 Recover...... 3–38 Store...... 3–39 Store...... 3–39 Name...... 3–40 Name...... 3–40 Calibrate Menu...... 3–42 Calibrate Menu...... 3–42 General Calibration Menu Information...... 3–42 General Calibration Menu Information...... 3–42 Waveform Calibration Information...... 3–42 Waveform Calibration Information...... 3–42 Waveform Calibration Procedure...... 3–43 Waveform Calibration Procedure...... 3–43 Calibration Information...... 3–46 Vectorscope Calibration Information...... 3–46 Vectorscope Calibration Procedure...... 3–46 Vectorscope Calibration Procedure...... 3–46 Vectorscope Calibration Procedure...... 3–49 Vectorscope Calibration Procedure...... 3–49 Configure Menu...... 3–52 Configure Menu...... 3–52 Changing Configurations...... 3–52 Changing Configurations...... 3–52

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual iii 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual iii Table of Contents Table of Contents

Measure Menu...... 3–56 Measure Menu...... 3–56 Using the Measure Menu...... 3–56 Using the Measure Menu...... 3–56 Beep...... 3–57 Beep...... 3–57 Store and Recall Modified Setups...... 3–57 Store and Recall Modified Setups...... 3–57 Making Measurements...... 3–58 Making Measurements...... 3–58 Measurements Measurements

Measurement Information...... 4–1 Measurement Information...... 4–1 Measurement...... 4–2 Differential Phase Measurement...... 4–2 Enter DIFF PHASE Mode...... 4–2 Enter DIFF PHASE Mode...... 4–2 Exit DIFF PHASE Mode...... 4–2 Exit DIFF PHASE Mode...... 4–2 DIFF PHASE Menu Selections...... 4–2 DIFF PHASE Menu Selections...... 4–2 DIFF PHASE Measurement Information...... 4–5 DIFF PHASE Measurement Information...... 4–5 Single-Trace DIFF PHASE Measurement Procedure. . . . . 4–5 Single-Trace DIFF PHASE Measurement Procedure. . . . . 4–5 Double-Trace DIFF PHASE Measurement Procedure. . . . 4–6 Double-Trace DIFF PHASE Measurement Procedure. . . . 4–6 Using Line Select in DIFF PHASE...... 4–6 Using Line Select in DIFF PHASE...... 4–6 Measurement...... 4–7 Differential Gain Measurement...... 4–7 Enter DIFF GAIN Mode...... 4–7 Enter DIFF GAIN Mode...... 4–7 Exit DIFF GAIN Mode...... 4–7 Exit DIFF GAIN Mode...... 4–7 DIFF GAIN Menu Selections...... 4–7 DIFF GAIN Menu Selections...... 4–7 DIFF GAIN Measurement Information...... 4–10 DIFF GAIN Measurement Information...... 4–10 Single-Trace DIFF GAIN Measurement Procedure...... 4–10 Single-Trace DIFF GAIN Measurement Procedure...... 4–10 Double-Trace DIFF GAIN Measurement Procedure...... 4–11 Double-Trace DIFF GAIN Measurement Procedure...... 4–11 Using Line Select in DIFF GAIN...... 4–11 Using Line Select in DIFF GAIN...... 4–11 Simultaneous Diff Phase & Diff Gain Measurements...... 4–12 Simultaneous Diff Phase & Diff Gain Measurements...... 4–12 Enter DP & DG Mode...... 4–12 Enter DP & DG Mode...... 4–12 Exit DP & DG Mode...... 4–12 Exit DP & DG Mode...... 4–12 DP & DG Menu Selections...... 4–12 DP & DG Menu Selections...... 4–12 DP & DG Measurement Information...... 4–14 DP & DG Measurement Information...... 4–14 DIFF PHASE & DIFF GAIN Measurement Procedure. . . 4–15 DIFF PHASE & DIFF GAIN Measurement Procedure. . . 4–15 Measurement...... 4–16 Noise Measurement...... 4–16 Enter Noise Measurement Mode...... 4–16 Enter Noise Measurement Mode...... 4–16 Exit Noise Measurement Mode...... 4–16 Exit Noise Measurement Mode...... 4–16 Noise Measurement Procedure...... 4–16 Noise Measurement Procedure...... 4–16 ICPM Measurement...... 4–17 ICPM Measurement...... 4–17 Enter ICPM Measurement Mode...... 4–17 Enter ICPM Measurement Mode...... 4–17 Exit ICPM Measurement Mode...... 4–17 Exit ICPM Measurement Mode...... 4–17 ICPM Measurement Information...... 4–17 ICPM Measurement Information...... 4–17 ICPM Measurement Procedure...... 4–18 ICPM Measurement Procedure...... 4–18

iv 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual iv 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Table of Contents Table of Contents

K Factor Measurement...... 4–20 K Factor Measurement...... 4–20 Enter K Factor Mode...... 4–20 Enter K Factor Mode...... 4–20 Making K Factor Measurements...... 4–20 Making K Factor Measurements...... 4–20 Chroma / Inequalities Measurement...... 4–23 Chroma / Luma Inequalities Measurement...... 4–23 Enter Chroma / Luma Mode...... 4–23 Enter Chroma / Luma Mode...... 4–23 Exit Chroma / Luma Mode...... 4–23 Exit Chroma / Luma Mode...... 4–23 Cursors in Chroma / Luma...... 4–23 Cursors in Chroma / Luma...... 4–23 Making Chroma / Luma Measurements (Using Cursors). . 4–23 Making Chroma / Luma Measurements (Using Cursors). . 4–23 Chroma / Luma Measurements with Lissajous Display. . . 4–27 Chroma / Luma Measurements with Lissajous Display. . . 4–27 Short-Time Measurement...... 4–28 Short-Time Distortion Measurement...... 4–28 Enter Short-Time Distortion Mode...... 4–28 Enter Short-Time Distortion Mode...... 4–28 Exit Short-Time Distortion Measurement Mode...... 4–28 Exit Short-Time Distortion Measurement Mode...... 4–28 Short-Time Distortion Measurement Procedure...... 4–28 Short-Time Distortion Measurement Procedure...... 4–28 R–Y Sweep Measurement...... 4–31 R–Y Sweep Measurement...... 4–31 Enter R–Y Sweep Mode...... 4–31 Enter R–Y Sweep Mode...... 4–31 Exit R–Y Sweep Measurement Mode...... 4–31 Exit R–Y Sweep Measurement Mode...... 4–31 R–Y Sweep Mode Information...... 4–32 R–Y Sweep Mode Information...... 4–32 Using R–Y Sweep Mode...... 4–32 Using R–Y Sweep Mode...... 4–32 Bowtie Measurement...... 4–33 Bowtie Measurement...... 4–33 Enter Bowtie Measurement Mode...... 4–33 Enter Bowtie Measurement Mode...... 4–33 Bowtie Measurement Procedure...... 4–33 Bowtie Measurement Procedure...... 4–33 FSC Time Marks Measurement...... 4–36 FSC Time Marks Measurement...... 4–36 Enter FSC Time Marks Measurement Mode...... 4–36 Enter FSC Time Marks Measurement Mode...... 4–36 Exit FSC Time Marks Measurement Mode...... 4–36 Exit FSC Time Marks Measurement Mode...... 4–36 Making SCH Phase Measurements...... 4–37 Making SCH Phase Measurements...... 4–37 Voltage Cursors in FSC Time Marks Mode...... 4–37 Voltage Cursors in FSC Time Marks Mode...... 4–37 Verifying Burst Position...... 4–37 Verifying Burst Position...... 4–37 Other Measurements...... 4–38 Other Measurements...... 4–38 Specifications Specifications Options and Accessories Options and Accessories

Options...... 6–1 Options...... 6–1 Accessories...... 6–1 Accessories...... 6–1 Standard Accessories...... 6–1 Standard Accessories...... 6–1 Optional Accessories...... 6–2 Optional Accessories...... 6–2 Index Index

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual v 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual v Table of Contents Table of Contents

List of Figures List of Figures

Figure 1–1: Location of the four screws that secure the Figure 1–1: Location of the four screws that secure the instrument to rack-mounting cabinet or portable case. 1–5 instrument to rack-mounting cabinet or portable case. 1–5 Figure 1–2: Dimensions used for rack-mounting the Figure 1–2: Dimensions used for rack-mounting the 1780R-Series Video Measurement Set...... 1–6 1780R-Series Video Measurement Set...... 1–6 Figure 1–3: Dimensions of the adjustable rear Figure 1–3: Dimensions of the adjustable rear rack-mounting bracket...... 1–7 rack-mounting bracket...... 1–7 Figure 1–4: Installing rear rack-mounting brackets for rack Figure 1–4: Installing rear rack-mounting brackets for rack applications of depths from 18 to 24 inches...... 1–8 applications of depths from 18 to 24 inches...... 1–8

Figure 2–1: Left side of front panel...... 2–4 Figure 2–1: Left side of front panel...... 2–4 Figure 2–2: Right side of front panel...... 2–10 Figure 2–2: Right side of front panel...... 2–10 Figure 2–3: Rear-Panel Connectors...... 2–17 Figure 2–3: Rear-Panel Connectors...... 2–17

Figure 3–1: Line Select Menu Screen with <2 OF 4> Fields Figure 3–1: Line Select Menu Screen with <2 OF 4> Fields selected...... 3–4 selected...... 3–4 Figure 3–2: Line Select Menu Screen with <1 OF 8> Fields Figure 3–2: Line Select Menu Screen with <1 OF 8> Fields selected...... 3–5 selected...... 3–5 Figure 3–3: 1780R Vector Graticule...... 3–7 Figure 3–3: 1780R Vector Graticule...... 3–7 Figure 3–4: 1781R Vector Graticule...... 3–8 Figure 3–4: 1781R Vector Graticule...... 3–8 Figure 3–5: Rear-panel X–Y Connector Pin Assignments. . 3–11 Figure 3–5: Rear-panel X–Y Connector Pin Assignments. . 3–11 Figure 3–6: 1780R Waveform Graticule...... 3–12 Figure 3–6: 1780R Waveform Graticule...... 3–12 Figure 3–7: 1781R Waveform Graticule...... 3–13 Figure 3–7: 1781R Waveform Graticule...... 3–13 Figure 3–8: REMOTE Connector Pin Assignments...... 3–15 Figure 3–8: REMOTE Connector Pin Assignments...... 3–15 Figure 3–9: Serial Interface Connector Pin Assignments. . 3–18 Figure 3–9: Serial Interface Connector Pin Assignments. . 3–18 Figure 3–10: Serial Interface Connector Wiring Converter 3–19 Figure 3–10: Serial Interface Connector Wiring Converter 3–19 Figure 3–11: Portion of the 1780R-Series Front Panel. . . . . 3–21 Figure 3–11: Portion of the 1780R-Series Front Panel. . . . . 3–21 Figure 3–12: Offsets Menu Screen...... 3–24 Figure 3–12: Offsets Menu Screen...... 3–24 Figure 3–13: WFM + CAL Readout with ABS selected. . . . 3–28 Figure 3–13: WFM + CAL Readout with ABS selected. . . . 3–28 Figure 3–14: WFM + CAL Readout with REL selected. . . 3–28 Figure 3–14: WFM + CAL Readout with REL selected. . . 3–28

vi 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual vi 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Table of Contents Table of Contents

Figure 3–15: Left Side of Front Panel, showing Menu Buttons Figure 3–15: Left Side of Front Panel, showing Menu Buttons and Touch Screen...... 3–31 and Touch Screen...... 3–31 Figure 3–16: Touch Screen 4 X 4 Matrix...... 3–33 Figure 3–16: Touch Screen 4 X 4 Matrix...... 3–33 Figure 3–17: Password Menu Screen...... 3–34 Figure 3–17: Password Menu Screen...... 3–34 Figure 3–18: Preset Menu Screen...... 3–36 Figure 3–18: Preset Menu Screen...... 3–36 Figure 3–19: Name Menu Screen...... 3–41 Figure 3–19: Name Menu Screen...... 3–41 Figure 3–20: Waveform Calibration Menu Display...... 3–44 Figure 3–20: Waveform Calibration Menu Display...... 3–44 Figure 3–21: Vectorscope Calibration Menu Display for Figure 3–21: Vectorscope Calibration Menu Display for 1780R (NTSC), software versions 1.11 & Up, with 1780R (NTSC), software versions 1.11 & Up, with CAL OSC Off...... 3–47 CAL OSC Off...... 3–47 Figure 3–22: Vectorscope Calibration Menu Display for Figure 3–22: Vectorscope Calibration Menu Display for 1780R (NTSC), software versions 1.11 & Up, with 1780R (NTSC), software versions 1.11 & Up, with CAL OSC On...... 3–48 CAL OSC On...... 3–48 Figure 3–23: Vectorscope Calibration Menu Display for Figure 3–23: Vectorscope Calibration Menu Display for 1781R (PAL) all software versions, and for 1780R (NTSC) 1781R (PAL) all software versions, and for 1780R (NTSC) software versions 1.10 & Below...... 3–50 software versions 1.10 & Below...... 3–50 Figure 3–24: Configure Menu Screen, page 1...... 3–53 Figure 3–24: Configure Menu Screen, page 1...... 3–53 Figure 3–25: Configure Menu Screen, page 2...... 3–54 Figure 3–25: Configure Menu Screen, page 2...... 3–54 Figure 3–26: Configure Menu Screen, page 3...... 3–55 Figure 3–26: Configure Menu Screen, page 3...... 3–55 Figure 3–27: Measure Menu Screen...... 3–56 Figure 3–27: Measure Menu Screen...... 3–56

Figure 4–1: Measure Menu Access...... 4–1 Figure 4–1: Measure Menu Access...... 4–1 Figure 4–2: Differential Phase Measurement...... 4–3 Figure 4–2: Differential Phase Measurement...... 4–3 Figure 4–3: Differential Gain Measurement...... 4–8 Figure 4–3: Differential Gain Measurement...... 4–8 Figure 4–4: DP & DG Measurement...... 4–13 Figure 4–4: DP & DG Measurement...... 4–13 Figure 4–5: Making ICPM Measurements...... 4–19 Figure 4–5: Making ICPM Measurements...... 4–19 Figure 4–6: K Factor Electronic Graticule...... 4–21 Figure 4–6: K Factor Electronic Graticule...... 4–21 Figure 4–7: Initial Chroma / Luma Inequalities Figure 4–7: Initial Chroma / Luma Inequalities Measurement Screen...... 4–24 Measurement Screen...... 4–24 Figure 4–8: Setting Timing Cursors to Pulse Width...... 4–26 Figure 4–8: Setting Timing Cursors to Pulse Width...... 4–26 Figure 4–9: Short-Time Distortion Electronic Graticule. . . 4–29 Figure 4–9: Short-Time Distortion Electronic Graticule. . . 4–29 Figure 4–10: Bowtie Measurement Screen...... 4–34 Figure 4–10: Bowtie Measurement Screen...... 4–34

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual vii 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual vii Table of Contents Table of Contents

List of Tables List of Tables

Table 2–1: Possible Parade and Overlay Configurations . . 2–11 Table 2–1: Possible Parade and Overlay Configurations . . 2–11 Table 2–2: Waveform Magnification ...... 2–13 Table 2–2: Waveform Magnification ...... 2–13 Table 2–3: Multiple Filter Displays ...... 2–14 Table 2–3: Multiple Filter Displays ...... 2–14 Table 2–4: Possible CH B1, CH B2, CH B3 Switch Settings 2–15 Table 2–4: Possible CH B1, CH B2, CH B3 Switch Settings 2–15

Table 3–1: Plug Jumpers for Vectorscope Board ...... 3–10 Table 3–1: Plug Jumpers for Vectorscope Board ...... 3–10 Table 3–2: Remote Pin Functions ...... 3–16 Table 3–2: Remote Pin Functions ...... 3–16 Table 3–3: Serial Remote Commands to the 1780R-Series . 3–20 Table 3–3: Serial Remote Commands to the 1780R-Series . 3–20 Table 3–4: 1780R-Series Responses ...... 3–20 Table 3–4: 1780R-Series Responses ...... 3–20 Table 3–5: Initial Settings ...... 3–37 Table 3–5: Initial Settings ...... 3–37 Table 3–6: Configure Menu Selections, page 1 ...... 3–53 Table 3–6: Configure Menu Selections, page 1 ...... 3–53 Table 3–7: Configure Menu Selections, page 2 ...... 3–54 Table 3–7: Configure Menu Selections, page 2 ...... 3–54 Table 3–8: Configure Menu Selections, page 3 ...... 3–55 Table 3–8: Configure Menu Selections, page 3 ...... 3–55 Table 3–9: Measure Menu Description ...... 3–57 Table 3–9: Measure Menu Description ...... 3–57

Table 4–1: DIFF PHASE Front-Panel Configuration . . . . . 4–4 Table 4–1: DIFF PHASE Front-Panel Configuration . . . . . 4–4 Table 4–2: DIFF GAIN Front-Panel Configuration ...... 4–9 Table 4–2: DIFF GAIN Front-Panel Configuration ...... 4–9 Table 4–3: DP & DG Front-Panel Configuration ...... 4–14 Table 4–3: DP & DG Front-Panel Configuration ...... 4–14 Table 4–4: ICPM Front-Panel Configuration ...... 4–17 Table 4–4: ICPM Front-Panel Configuration ...... 4–17 Table 4–5: K Factor Front-Panel Configuration ...... 4–22 Table 4–5: K Factor Front-Panel Configuration ...... 4–22 Table 4–6: Chroma / Luma Front-Panel Configuration . . . 4–25 Table 4–6: Chroma / Luma Front-Panel Configuration . . . 4–25 Table 4–7: Short-Time Distortion Mode Front-Panel Table 4–7: Short-Time Distortion Mode Front-Panel Configuration ...... 4–30 Configuration ...... 4–30 Table 4–8: R–Y Sweep Mode Front-Panel Configuration . 4–31 Table 4–8: R–Y Sweep Mode Front-Panel Configuration . 4–31 Table 4–9: Bowtie Mode Front-Panel Configuration . . . . . 4–35 Table 4–9: Bowtie Mode Front-Panel Configuration . . . . . 4–35

Table 4–10: FSC Time Marks Front-Panel Configuration . 4–36 Table 4–10: FSC Time Marks Front-Panel Configuration . 4–36

Table 5–1: Input/Output ...... 5–1 Table 5–1: Input/Output ...... 5–1

viii 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual viii 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Table of Contents Table of Contents

Table 5–2: Waveform Monitor Vertical System ...... 5–2 Table 5–2: Waveform Monitor Vertical System ...... 5–2 Table 5–3: Waveform Monitor Probe Input ...... 5–7 Table 5–3: Waveform Monitor Probe Input ...... 5–7 Table 5–4: Waveform Monitor Horizontal Deflection Table 5–4: Waveform Monitor Horizontal Deflection System ...... 5–7 System ...... 5–7 Table 5–5: Waveform Monitor DG and DP Display ...... 5–11 Table 5–5: Waveform Monitor DG and DP Display ...... 5–11 Table 5–6: Synchronization ...... 5–13 Table 5–6: Synchronization ...... 5–13 Table 5–7: Vectorscope Vector Display ...... 5–15 Table 5–7: Vectorscope Vector Display ...... 5–15 Table 5–8: Vectorscope XY Display ...... 5–18 Table 5–8: Vectorscope XY Display ...... 5–18 Table 5–9: Vectorscope SCH Phase Display ...... 5–18 Table 5–9: Vectorscope SCH Phase Display ...... 5–18 Table 5–10: CRTs and High Voltage Supplies ...... 5–19 Table 5–10: CRTs and High Voltage Supplies ...... 5–19 Table 5–11: Power Requirements ...... 5–20 Table 5–11: Power Requirements ...... 5–20 Table 5–12: Physical Characteristics ...... 5–20 Table 5–12: Physical Characteristics ...... 5–20 Table 5–13: Certifications ...... 5–21 Table 5–13: Certifications ...... 5–21 Table 5–14: Environmental Summary ...... 5–21 Table 5–14: Environmental Summary ...... 5–21

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual ix 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual ix Table of Contents Table of Contents

x 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual x 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual General Safety Summary General Safety Summary

Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or any products connected to it. To avoid damage to this product or any products connected to it. To avoid potential hazards, use this product only as specified. potential hazards, use this product only as specified. Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures. Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures. To Avoid Fire or Personal Injury To Avoid Fire or Personal Injury Use Proper Power Cord. Use only the power cord specified for this Use Proper Power Cord. Use only the power cord specified for this product and certified for the country of use. product and certified for the country of use. Use Proper Voltage Setting. Before applying power, ensure that the line Use Proper Voltage Setting. Before applying power, ensure that the line selector is in the proper position for the power source being used. selector is in the proper position for the power source being used. Connect and Disconnect Properly. Do not connect or disconnect probes Connect and Disconnect Properly. Do not connect or disconnect probes or test leads while they are connected to a voltage source. or test leads while they are connected to a voltage source. Ground the Product. This product is grounded through the grounding Ground the Product. This product is grounded through the grounding conductor of the power cord. To avoid electric shock, the grounding conductor of the power cord. To avoid electric shock, the grounding conductor must be connected to earth ground. Before making conductor must be connected to earth ground. Before making connections to the input or output terminals of the product, ensure connections to the input or output terminals of the product, ensure that the product is properly grounded. that the product is properly grounded. Observe All Terminal Ratings. To avoid fire or shock hazard, observe all Observe All Terminal Ratings. To avoid fire or shock hazard, observe all ratings and markings on the product. Consult the product manual for ratings and markings on the product. Consult the product manual for further ratings information before making connections to the product. further ratings information before making connections to the product. Do not apply a potential to any terminal, including the common Do not apply a potential to any terminal, including the common terminal, that exceeds the maximum rating of that terminal. terminal, that exceeds the maximum rating of that terminal.

Do Not Operate Without Covers. Do not operate this product with Do Not Operate Without Covers. Do not operate this product with covers or panels removed. covers or panels removed. Use Proper Fuse. Use only the fuse type and rating specified for this Use Proper Fuse. Use only the fuse type and rating specified for this product. product. Avoid Exposed Circuitry. Do not touch exposed connections and Avoid Exposed Circuitry. Do not touch exposed connections and components when power is present. components when power is present. Wear Eye Protection. Wear eye protection if exposure to high-intensity Wear Eye Protection. Wear eye protection if exposure to high-intensity rays or laser radiation exists. rays or laser radiation exists. Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures. If you suspect there is damage Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures. If you suspect there is damage to this product, have it inspected by qualified service personnel. to this product, have it inspected by qualified service personnel.

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual xi 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual xi General Safety Summary General Safety Summary

Do Not Operate in Wet/Damp Conditions. Do Not Operate in Wet/Damp Conditions. Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere. Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere. Keep Product Surfaces Clean and Dry. Keep Product Surfaces Clean and Dry. Provide Proper Ventilation. Refer to the manual’s installation Provide Proper Ventilation. Refer to the manual’s installation instructions for details on installing the product so it has proper instructions for details on installing the product so it has proper ventilation. ventilation. Safety Terms and Symbols Safety Terms and Symbols Terms in This Manual. These terms may appear in this manual: Terms in This Manual. These terms may appear in this manual:

WARNING. Warning statements identify conditions or practices that WARNING. Warning statements identify conditions or practices that could result in injury or loss of life. could result in injury or loss of life.

CAUTION. Caution statements identify conditions or practices that CAUTION. Caution statements identify conditions or practices that could result in damage to this product or other property. could result in damage to this product or other property.

Terms on the Product. These terms may appear on the product: Terms on the Product. These terms may appear on the product: DANGER indicates an injury hazard immediately accessible as you DANGER indicates an injury hazard immediately accessible as you read the marking. read the marking. WARNING indicates an injury hazard not immediately accessible as WARNING indicates an injury hazard not immediately accessible as you read the marking. you read the marking. CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product. CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product. Symbols on the Product. These symbols may appear on the product: Symbols on the Product. These symbols may appear on the product:

CAUTION WARNING Double Protective Ground CAUTION WARNING Double Protective Ground Refer to Manual High Voltage Insulated (Earth) Terminal Refer to Manual High Voltage Insulated (Earth) Terminal

Not suitable for Not suitable for connection to connection to the public telecom- the public telecom- munications network munications network

xii 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual xii 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Getting Started Getting Started

Getting Started Getting Started

Documentation Overview Documentation Overview This operator’s manual is one of a set of two manuals that document This operator’s manual is one of a set of two manuals that document the Tektronix 1780R-Series Video Measurement Set. To purchase a the Tektronix 1780R-Series Video Measurement Set. To purchase a service manual, please refer to the “Contacting Tektronix” page service manual, please refer to the “Contacting Tektronix” page located near the front of this manual for address and phone number located near the front of this manual for address and phone number information. information. The topics covered in the two manuals are as follows: The topics covered in the two manuals are as follows:

Operator’s Manual Operator’s Manual Section 1 Document Overview Section 1 Document Overview Product Overview Product Overview Installation Installation Section 2 Connectors, Controls, Indicators Section 2 Connectors, Controls, Indicators (including front- and rear-panel illustrations) (including front- and rear-panel illustrations) Section 3 Operating Instructions (including menus) Section 3 Operating Instructions (including menus) Section 4 Measurements Section 4 Measurements Section 5 Specifications Section 5 Specifications Section 6 Options and Accessories Section 6 Options and Accessories

Service Manual Service Manual Installation Installation Theory of Operation Theory of Operation Performance Check and Adjustment Procedure Performance Check and Adjustment Procedure Maintenance Maintenance Options Options Replaceable Electrical and Mechanical Parts Lists Replaceable Electrical and Mechanical Parts Lists (with accessory part numbers) (with accessory part numbers) Schematic Diagrams and Circuit Board Illustrations Schematic Diagrams and Circuit Board Illustrations

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 1–1 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 1–1 Getting Started Getting Started

Documentation Conventions Documentation Conventions Within this manual, front-panel push-button names are shown all in Within this manual, front-panel push-button names are shown all in capitals, such as the PRESET menu button. Touch screen words are capitals, such as the PRESET menu button. Touch screen words are represented in brackets, such as . CRT instructional represented in brackets, such as . CRT instructional labels, such as SELECT MEASUREMENT, are represented in italics labels, such as SELECT MEASUREMENT, are represented in italics in the manual and on the instrument CRT. in the manual and on the instrument CRT. In menu operation, most selections are made by actually touching In menu operation, most selections are made by actually touching the desired area on the CRT screen. This is indicated in the manual the desired area on the CRT screen. This is indicated in the manual instructions by the use of the word ‘touch’ (as opposed to ‘push’ for instructions by the use of the word ‘touch’ (as opposed to ‘push’ for front-panel push buttons). front-panel push buttons).

Who Should Use This Operator’s Manual: Who Should Use This Operator’s Manual: This operator’s manual contains information necessary for daily use, This operator’s manual contains information necessary for daily use, and is appropriate for use by anyone who operates the 1780R-Series and is appropriate for use by anyone who operates the 1780R-Series Video Measurement Set. (The service manual is intended for use by Video Measurement Set. (The service manual is intended for use by qualified service personnel only.) qualified service personnel only.)

1780R-Series Product Overview 1780R-Series Product Overview The 1780R-Series Video Measurement Set is a wide bandwidth, The 1780R-Series Video Measurement Set is a wide bandwidth, multi-input, waveform/vector/SCH measurement package. multi-input, waveform/vector/SCH measurement package. The advantages of separate waveform and vector instruments are The advantages of separate waveform and vector instruments are provided in a single package. Specific measurements take advantage provided in a single package. Specific measurements take advantage of the 1780R-Series’ shared waveform monitor and vectorscope of the 1780R-Series’ shared waveform monitor and vectorscope internal processing. internal processing. Separate waveform and vectorscope CRTs allow simultaneous Separate waveform and vectorscope CRTs allow simultaneous monitoring of several video parameters. monitoring of several video parameters. Four video inputs may be individually displayed or selected in Four video inputs may be individually displayed or selected in various combinations on the waveform monitor. Vector presentations various combinations on the waveform monitor. Vector presentations may be individually displayed, overlaid for comparison, or compared may be individually displayed, overlaid for comparison, or compared to an external reference. A fifth video signal may be selected for to an external reference. A fifth video signal may be selected for individual display via the high-impedance front-panel probe input. individual display via the high-impedance front-panel probe input. Internal video filters provide specialized measurements, with dual or Internal video filters provide specialized measurements, with dual or triple filter modes available for simultaneous display. triple filter modes available for simultaneous display.

1–2 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 1–2 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Getting Started Getting Started

A selection of internal and external graticules and electronic cursors A selection of internal and external graticules and electronic cursors permit measurements specific to many studio and transmission permit measurements specific to many studio and transmission system applications. An external horizontal input facilitates ICPM system applications. An external horizontal input facilitates ICPM measurements. measurements. External staircase from a camera control unit may be selected External staircase from a camera control unit may be selected remotely. remotely. Slow sweep is standard on the 1780R-Series. Slow sweep is standard on the 1780R-Series.

New Capabilities New Capabilities A precision phase control, with on-screen digital phase readout, A precision phase control, with on-screen digital phase readout, allows precision phase angle measurements. Differential display allows precision phase angle measurements. Differential display _ _ _ _ resolution is within .05 , with an absolute accuracy of 0.1 around resolution is within .05 , with an absolute accuracy of 0.1 around _ _ the full 360 vector range. the full 360 vector range. The Tektronix double-trace differential phase measurement The Tektronix double-trace differential phase measurement technique has been enhanced with a digital recursive vertical filter to technique has been enhanced with a digital recursive vertical filter to permit accurate on-screen readouts in the presence of noise. permit accurate on-screen readouts in the presence of noise.

The FSC Time Marks feature (NTSC ONLY) allows the operator to The FSC Time Marks feature (NTSC ONLY) allows the operator to verify the accuracy of SCH Phase measurements. verify the accuracy of SCH Phase measurements. Voltage cursors or Timing cursors can be set to any point, providing Voltage cursors or Timing cursors can be set to any point, providing accurate on-screen measurement readouts, and are fully operational accurate on-screen measurement readouts, and are fully operational and accurate at all Gain and Magnifier settings. and accurate at all Gain and Magnifier settings. In addition to the standard remote interface provided on 1700 Series In addition to the standard remote interface provided on 1700 Series products, the 1780R-Series provides a serial remote interface, products, the 1780R-Series provides a serial remote interface, compatible with RS232 and RS422 standards. compatible with RS232 and RS422 standards.

Touch Screen Touch Screen The 1780R-Series has four main menu modes that provide on-screen The 1780R-Series has four main menu modes that provide on-screen measurement and calibration selections. Through the Preset menu, measurement and calibration selections. Through the Preset menu, the operator can define, name, save, and recall up to 12 front-panel the operator can define, name, save, and recall up to 12 front-panel setups. setups. Many instrument settings can be easily changed through the Many instrument settings can be easily changed through the 1780R-Series touch screen menus. For example, the Configure menu 1780R-Series touch screen menus. For example, the Configure menu allows the choice of internal or external graticule illumination, and allows the choice of internal or external graticule illumination, and the Calibrate menu allows trace rotation and readout intensity the Calibrate menu allows trace rotation and readout intensity adjustments. The Measurement menu provides entry into specific adjustments. The Measurement menu provides entry into specific measurement modes. measurement modes.

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 1–3 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 1–3 Getting Started Getting Started

1780R-Series Package 1780R-Series Package The 1780R-Series is supplied as a single 5 1/4-inch high package, The 1780R-Series is supplied as a single 5 1/4-inch high package, ready for rack-mounting. A portable cabinet is available, providing ready for rack-mounting. A portable cabinet is available, providing handle, feet, and front and rear covers. The instrument is equipped handle, feet, and front and rear covers. The instrument is equipped with a high reliability cooling fan so that no clearance is required with a high reliability cooling fan so that no clearance is required above or below the 1780R-Series. above or below the 1780R-Series.

Mechanical Installation Mechanical Installation All qualification testing for the 1780R-Series was performed with All qualification testing for the 1780R-Series was performed with the rack-mount cabinet installed. To guarantee compliance with the rack-mount cabinet installed. To guarantee compliance with specifications, the instrument should be operated in a cabinet, either specifications, the instrument should be operated in a cabinet, either the rack-mount cabinet or the portable case (1780F02). The 1780F02 the rack-mount cabinet or the portable case (1780F02). The 1780F02 case has a handle and front and back covers. The front and back case has a handle and front and back covers. The front and back covers provide protection for the instrument during transportation covers provide protection for the instrument during transportation and storage. and storage.

NOTE. Cabinet drawings are provided for installation information NOTE. Cabinet drawings are provided for installation information only, and are not to scale. All dimensions are in inches. only, and are not to scale. All dimensions are in inches.

The rack-mounting cabinet is a standard accessory; all instruments The rack-mounting cabinet is a standard accessory; all instruments are factory shipped in this cabinet. Rack-mounting hardware is are factory shipped in this cabinet. Rack-mounting hardware is included and listed in Table 1–1. The portable case (1780F02) is included and listed in Table 1–1. The portable case (1780F02) is available from Tektronix as an Optional Accessory. It, as does the available from Tektronix as an Optional Accessory. It, as does the rack-mounting cabinet, provides the proper electrical environment rack-mounting cabinet, provides the proper electrical environment for the instrument, supplies adequate shielding, minimizes handling for the instrument, supplies adequate shielding, minimizes handling damage, and reduces dust collection within the instrument. damage, and reduces dust collection within the instrument.

Rack-Mounting Rack-Mounting The 1780R-Series rack-mounting cabinet is designed for permanent The 1780R-Series rack-mounting cabinet is designed for permanent mounting. The instrument slides in and out of the cabinet with mounting. The instrument slides in and out of the cabinet with relative ease. The instrument is secured in the cabinet with four 6–32 relative ease. The instrument is secured in the cabinet with four 6–32 R R TORX drive screws. See Figure 1–1. TORX drive screws. See Figure 1–1.

1–4 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 1–4 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Getting Started Getting Started

Figure 1–1: Location of the four screws that secure the instrument to Figure 1–1: Location of the four screws that secure the instrument to rack-mounting cabinet or portable case rack-mounting cabinet or portable case

WARNING. Do not attempt to carry a cabinetized instrument without WARNING. Do not attempt to carry a cabinetized instrument without installing the rear-panel mounting screws. There is nothing to hold installing the rear-panel mounting screws. There is nothing to hold the instrument in the cabinet if it is tipped forward. the instrument in the cabinet if it is tipped forward.

Table 1–1: Rack-Mounting Hardware Included Table 1–1: Rack-Mounting Hardware Included

Qty Description Part Number Qty Description Part Number 2 Bracket, Extension: 2.5 X 8.06 X 0.06, Steel 407-3752-00 2 Bracket, Extension: 2.5 X 8.06 X 0.06, Steel 407-3752-00 2 Nut Bar: (3) 10-32 X 3.0 X 0.375 X 0.125, Aluminum 381-0251-00 2 Nut Bar: (3) 10-32 X 3.0 X 0.375 X 0.125, Aluminum 381-0251-00 12 Screw, Machine: 10-32 X 0.625, Steel 212-0577-00 12 Screw, Machine: 10-32 X 0.625, Steel 212-0577-00 4 Washer, Flat: 0.203 ID X 0.625 OD X 0.062, Steel 210-1061-00 4 Washer, Flat: 0.203 ID X 0.625 OD X 0.062, Steel 210-1061-00

A front clearance of at least 18 inches is required for removing the A front clearance of at least 18 inches is required for removing the instrument from the rack. BNC connectors on the rear panel extend instrument from the rack. BNC connectors on the rear panel extend approximately 0.6 inches, making it necessary to have 1 inch or approximately 0.6 inches, making it necessary to have 1 inch or more of rear clearance to have enough room to cable the instrument. more of rear clearance to have enough room to cable the instrument. See Figure 1–2 for rack-mounting dimensions. See Figure 1–2 for rack-mounting dimensions.

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 1–5 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 1–5 Getting Started Getting Started

Figure 1–2: Dimensions used for rack-mounting the 1780R-Series Video Figure 1–2: Dimensions used for rack-mounting the 1780R-Series Video Measurement Set Measurement Set

1–6 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 1–6 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Getting Started Getting Started

Figure 1–3: Dimensions of the adjustable rear rack-mounting bracket Figure 1–3: Dimensions of the adjustable rear rack-mounting bracket

To install the instrument in the rack: First remove the four securing To install the instrument in the rack: First remove the four securing screws and take the instrument out of the rack-mounting cabinet. screws and take the instrument out of the rack-mounting cabinet. (All 1780R-Series instruments are shipped in the rack-mounting (All 1780R-Series instruments are shipped in the rack-mounting cabinet to provide extra shipping protection.) Once the instrument is cabinet to provide extra shipping protection.) Once the instrument is out of the cabinet, mount the front of the cabinet in the rack, using out of the cabinet, mount the front of the cabinet in the rack, using R R four 10–32 TORX screws. Cabinet front slots are spaced, and wide four 10–32 TORX screws. Cabinet front slots are spaced, and wide enough, to accommodate standard racks. Next, mount the adjustable enough, to accommodate standard racks. Next, mount the adjustable brackets to the rear rack section. See Figure 1–3 for bracket brackets to the rear rack section. See Figure 1–3 for bracket dimensions. Then mount the adjustable brackets to the rack-mount dimensions. Then mount the adjustable brackets to the rack-mount R R cabinet using four 10–32 TORX screws, four number 10 flat cabinet using four 10–32 TORX screws, four number 10 flat washers, and the nut bars. See Figure 1–4 for more assembly detail. washers, and the nut bars. See Figure 1–4 for more assembly detail. Finally, re-install the four 6–32 screws that secure the instrument to Finally, re-install the four 6–32 screws that secure the instrument to the rack-mounting cabinet. See Figure 1–1. the rack-mounting cabinet. See Figure 1–1.

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 1–7 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 1–7 Getting Started Getting Started

Figure 1–4: Installing rear rack-mounting brackets for rack applications Figure 1–4: Installing rear rack-mounting brackets for rack applications of depths from 18 to 24 inches of depths from 18 to 24 inches

NOTE. For ease of installation, place the nut bars to the outside of NOTE. For ease of installation, place the nut bars to the outside of the adjustable brackets and drive the screws from the center into the the adjustable brackets and drive the screws from the center into the nut bars. nut bars.

For applications where it is necessary to rack-mount the instrument, For applications where it is necessary to rack-mount the instrument, but have it removable with the instrument case, order the 1780F05 but have it removable with the instrument case, order the 1780F05 Rack-Mount Shelf. Rack-Mount Shelf.

1–8 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 1–8 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Getting Started Getting Started

Options Options The 1780R-Series is shipped with a standard U.S. plug, or can be The 1780R-Series is shipped with a standard U.S. plug, or can be ordered with one of the following options. ordered with one of the following options. Option A1 (220 V, European plug) Option A1 (220 V, European plug) Option A2 (240 V, United Kingdom plug) Option A2 (240 V, United Kingdom plug) Option A3 (240 V, Australian plug) Option A3 (240 V, Australian plug) These are the only options currently available for the 1780R-Series. These are the only options currently available for the 1780R-Series. Part numbers are listed in Section 6. Part numbers are listed in Section 6.

Standard Accessories Standard Accessories The following accessories are shipped with the 1780R-Series. Part The following accessories are shipped with the 1780R-Series. Part numbers are listed in Section 6. numbers are listed in Section 6. 1 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 1 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 1 Cable, Power (Standard, Opt A1, A2, or A3) 1 Cable, Power (Standard, Opt A1, A2, or A3) 1 Filter, Air 1 Filter, Air 1 Graticule, 511-1979, Visual (1780R ONLY) 1 Graticule, 511-1979, Visual (1780R ONLY) 1 Graticule, 511-1979, Photographic (1780R ONLY) 1 Graticule, 511-1979, Photographic (1780R ONLY) 1 Graticule, K-Factor, Visual (1781R ONLY) 1 Graticule, K-Factor, Visual (1781R ONLY) 1 Graticule, K-Factor, Photographic (1781R ONLY) 1 Graticule, K-Factor, Photographic (1781R ONLY) 3 Graticule Lamp, Incandescent 3 Graticule Lamp, Incandescent 1 Replacement Cartridge Fuse, 2 A Slow Blow 1 Replacement Cartridge Fuse, 2 A Slow Blow

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 1–9 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 1–9 Getting Started Getting Started

Optional Accessories Optional Accessories The following is a list of the most common accessory items for the The following is a list of the most common accessory items for the 1780R-Series. Part numbers, if applicable, are listed in Section 6. 1780R-Series. Part numbers, if applicable, are listed in Section 6. 1780R-Series Service Manual 1780R-Series Service Manual Viewing Hood Viewing Hood Portable Cabinet Portable Cabinet Extender Kit for Oscillator and Z-Axis Circuit Boards Extender Kit for Oscillator and Z-Axis Circuit Boards

1–10 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 1–10 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Connectors, Controls, Indicators Connectors, Controls, Indicators

Connectors, Controls, Indicators Connectors, Controls, Indicators

This section provides an overview of control and connector This section provides an overview of control and connector functions. To locate more detailed information, please refer to the functions. To locate more detailed information, please refer to the manual index or table of contents. manual index or table of contents.

Switches Switches Push and release the front-panel switches to toggle between Push and release the front-panel switches to toggle between selections. Push and hold to access outlined selections. selections. Push and hold to access outlined selections.

Companion Switches Companion Switches Some switch functions are paired or grouped so that two or three Some switch functions are paired or grouped so that two or three switches determine one display. These are referred to in this manual switches determine one display. These are referred to in this manual as companion switches. as companion switches. Pushing the same companion switch twice in succession will change Pushing the same companion switch twice in succession will change its selection (as indicated by the LED). its selection (as indicated by the LED). Pushing first one companion switch and then another will cause the Pushing first one companion switch and then another will cause the display to alternate between the first switch selection and the second display to alternate between the first switch selection and the second switch selection. Held functions will be forced to the top function of switch selection. Held functions will be forced to the top function of the switch. For example, VECT and SCH together reverts to VECT. the switch. For example, VECT and SCH together reverts to VECT.

Controls Controls All front-panel controls are continuous except the Horizontal All front-panel controls are continuous except the Horizontal Position control, which has stops. It also has a spring return which Position control, which has stops. It also has a spring return which returns it to the center position. The further from center the control is returns it to the center position. The further from center the control is turned, the faster the display moves. This is useful in MAG turned, the faster the display moves. This is useful in MAG operation. operation. The five CRT controls (Focus, Scale, Intens, VPOS, and HPOS) are The five CRT controls (Focus, Scale, Intens, VPOS, and HPOS) are used to adjust both CRTs. Refer to CRT Controls for details. used to adjust both CRTs. Refer to CRT Controls for details.

LEDs LEDs Green LEDs indicate front-panel switch selections. Some LEDs are Green LEDs indicate front-panel switch selections. Some LEDs are located next to the function label, and some are located in the switch located next to the function label, and some are located in the switch itself. itself. Red LEDs indicate an uncalibrated gain condition. Red LEDs indicate an uncalibrated gain condition.

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 2–1 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 2–1 Connectors, Controls, Indicators Connectors, Controls, Indicators

Audio Feedback (Beep) Audio Feedback (Beep) A Beep Sounds When: A Beep Sounds When: The limit of a front-panel control range has been reached. The limit of a front-panel control range has been reached. An attempt is made to change a locked setting. An attempt is made to change a locked setting. An attempt is made to access an invalid condition, such as a Parade An attempt is made to access an invalid condition, such as a Parade display in 1-line mode. display in 1-line mode.

Disable the Beep Disable the Beep Selecting Beep Off in the Configure menu will disable the beep for Selecting Beep Off in the Configure menu will disable the beep for all cases except touch screen selection. all cases except touch screen selection.

A “Click” Occurs When: A “Click” Occurs When: A touch screen selection is made. (Click cannot be disabled.) A touch screen selection is made. (Click cannot be disabled.)

Touch Screen Touch Screen Both CRTs are equipped with 4 × 4 (four vertical and four horizontal Both CRTs are equipped with 4 × 4 (four vertical and four horizontal divisions) LED matrix touch screens to provide menu access to divisions) LED matrix touch screens to provide menu access to additional instrument functions. additional instrument functions. Selections are made by touching the desired function on the CRT Selections are made by touching the desired function on the CRT screen. screen. Instructional labels, such as SELECT MEASUREMENT, are shown Instructional labels, such as SELECT MEASUREMENT, are shown on the CRT screen in italics. on the CRT screen in italics. Touching the CRT screen is indicated in this manual by the use of Touching the CRT screen is indicated in this manual by the use of the word ‘touch’ (as opposed to ‘push’ for front-panel switches). the word ‘touch’ (as opposed to ‘push’ for front-panel switches). A “click” indicates that a touch screen selection has been made. A “click” indicates that a touch screen selection has been made. If two or more choices are available, the current selection will be If two or more choices are available, the current selection will be outlined on the screen. outlined on the screen. If a menu choice is not displayed, nothing will happen when the If a menu choice is not displayed, nothing will happen when the screen is touched. screen is touched. A circle around a menu choice indicates the current assignment of A circle around a menu choice indicates the current assignment of the large knob. the large knob.

2–2 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 2–2 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Connectors, Controls, Indicators Connectors, Controls, Indicators

Front-Panel Controls Front-Panel Controls

NOTE. Locations for the following controls are shown in Figure 2–1. NOTE. Locations for the following controls are shown in Figure 2–1.

Power Power 1. POWER. The Power push-button switch turns the instrument on 1. POWER. The Power push-button switch turns the instrument on or to standby status, and displays a colored spot inside the switch or to standby status, and displays a colored spot inside the switch when power is on. when power is on.

CRT Controls CRT Controls The five CRT controls (Focus, Scale, Intens, VPOS, and HPOS) are The five CRT controls (Focus, Scale, Intens, VPOS, and HPOS) are used to adjust both CRTs. Assignment of these controls from one used to adjust both CRTs. Assignment of these controls from one CRT to the other is controlled by two illuminated switches, one CRT to the other is controlled by two illuminated switches, one under the left CRT and one under the right CRT. under the left CRT and one under the right CRT. When is selected (Configure menu, described When is selected (Configure menu, described in Section 3), vectorscope assignment of CRT controls will revert to in Section 3), vectorscope assignment of CRT controls will revert to waveform assignment after 30 seconds of no knob activity. waveform assignment after 30 seconds of no knob activity. The settings of the five CRT controls are saved and restored when The settings of the five CRT controls are saved and restored when toggling between waveform and vector assignments. toggling between waveform and vector assignments. 2. Left switch. This switch assigns the Focus, Scale, Intensity, and 2. Left switch. This switch assigns the Focus, Scale, Intensity, and Position controls to operate with the left (vectorscope) CRT. Position controls to operate with the left (vectorscope) CRT. 3. Right switch. This switch assigns the Focus, Scale, Intensity, and 3. Right switch. This switch assigns the Focus, Scale, Intensity, and Position controls to operate with the right (waveform monitor) Position controls to operate with the right (waveform monitor) CRT. CRT. 4. SCALE. The Scale control adjusts the level of graticule 4. SCALE. The Scale control adjusts the level of graticule illumination. A beep indicates the limits of the control range. illumination. A beep indicates the limits of the control range. 5. FOCUS. The Focus control adjusts the beam for optimum 5. FOCUS. The Focus control adjusts the beam for optimum definition. A beep indicates the limits of the control range. definition. A beep indicates the limits of the control range. 6. INTENS. The Intensity control adjusts display brightness. A beep 6. INTENS. The Intensity control adjusts display brightness. A beep indicates the limits of the control range. indicates the limits of the control range.

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 2–3 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 2–3 Connectors, Controls, Indicators Connectors, Controls, Indicators

Figure 2–1: Left side of front panel Figure 2–1: Left side of front panel

2–4 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 2–4 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Connectors, Controls, Indicators Connectors, Controls, Indicators

7. VERT POS. Use the Vertical Position control to move the display 7. VERT POS. Use the Vertical Position control to move the display up and down. A beep indicates the limits of the control range. up and down. A beep indicates the limits of the control range. (Positioning range is greater for waveform monitor than for (Positioning range is greater for waveform monitor than for vectorscope.) vectorscope.) 8. HORIZ POS. Use the Horizontal Position control to move the 8. HORIZ POS. Use the Horizontal Position control to move the display left and right. Below SNs B020245 only, this is a spring display left and right. Below SNs B020245 only, this is a spring activated control; turn the control more to move the display activated control; turn the control more to move the display faster. A beep indicates the limits of the control range. (Position- faster. A beep indicates the limits of the control range. (Position- ing range is greater for waveform monitor than for vectorscope.) ing range is greater for waveform monitor than for vectorscope.)

Precision Measurement (Large Knob) Precision Measurement (Large Knob)

NOTE. Detailed measurement information is located in Section 4. NOTE. Detailed measurement information is located in Section 4.

The TIME and VOLTAGE CURSORS, PHASE SHIFT, and LINE The TIME and VOLTAGE CURSORS, PHASE SHIFT, and LINE SELECT switches are enabled by pushing the corresponding switch, SELECT switches are enabled by pushing the corresponding switch, and exited by pushing that switch again. and exited by pushing that switch again. While any of these modes is enabled, rotating the large knob While any of these modes is enabled, rotating the large knob provides continuous adjustment, and pushing the < > buttons provides continuous adjustment, and pushing the < > buttons provides single-step adjustment. provides single-step adjustment. Two, three, or all four of these functions can be enabled at once. Two, three, or all four of these functions can be enabled at once. Separate readouts are provided for each function. Large knob Separate readouts are provided for each function. Large knob assignment is determined by the last function button pushed, and can assignment is determined by the last function button pushed, and can be changed by touching the desired readout area of the CRT screen. be changed by touching the desired readout area of the CRT screen. Current assignment is circled. Current assignment is circled.

NOTE. Detailed Timing and Voltage Cursor information is located in NOTE. Detailed Timing and Voltage Cursor information is located in Section 3. Section 3.

9. TIME CURSORS. This switch enables the timing cursors. The 9. TIME CURSORS. This switch enables the timing cursors. The Timing Cursor menu on the vectorscope CRT provides a choice Timing Cursor menu on the vectorscope CRT provides a choice of cursors that track together or are positioned separately, and a of cursors that track together or are positioned separately, and a choice between locate and measure. choice between locate and measure. The readout indicates the time difference between Cursor One The readout indicates the time difference between Cursor One and Cursor Two, in increments of 5 nanoseconds. If magnifica- and Cursor Two, in increments of 5 nanoseconds. If magnifica-

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 2–5 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 2–5 Connectors, Controls, Indicators Connectors, Controls, Indicators

tion or variable sweep is selected, the cursor interval is magnified tion or variable sweep is selected, the cursor interval is magnified correspondingly. correspondingly. To change the large knob assignment from one cursor to another, To change the large knob assignment from one cursor to another, touch the quadrant labeled . The touch the quadrant labeled . The current assignment is outlined by a box. current assignment is outlined by a box. Timing cursors are not valid in Field mode. Timing cursors are not valid in Field mode. For software versions 1.13 and up, installed in instruments SN For software versions 1.13 and up, installed in instruments SN B020100 and up: Refer to (11) LINE SELECT for information on B020100 and up: Refer to (11) LINE SELECT for information on Timing Cursors in Line Select mode. Timing Cursors in Line Select mode.

NOTE. Detailed Timing and Voltage Cursor information is located in NOTE. Detailed Timing and Voltage Cursor information is located in Section 3. Section 3.

10. VOLTAGE CURSORS. This switch enables the voltage cursors. 10. VOLTAGE CURSORS. This switch enables the voltage cursors. The Voltage Cursor menu on the vectorscope CRT provides a The Voltage Cursor menu on the vectorscope CRT provides a choice of cursors that track together or are positioned separately, choice of cursors that track together or are positioned separately, and a choice between absolute and relative readout. Cursor One and a choice between absolute and relative readout. Cursor One appears as a dashed horizontal line, and Cursor Two as a series of appears as a dashed horizontal line, and Cursor Two as a series of two short dashes on the waveform monitor display. If vertical two short dashes on the waveform monitor display. If vertical gain is employed, the cursor interval is magnified accordingly. gain is employed, the cursor interval is magnified accordingly. To change the large knob assignment from one cursor to another, To change the large knob assignment from one cursor to another, touch the quadrant labeled . Current touch the quadrant labeled . Current assignment is outlined by a box. assignment is outlined by a box. 11. LINE SELECT This switch enables the line select function, 11. LINE SELECT This switch enables the line select function, which is available for both waveform and vectorscope. For which is available for both waveform and vectorscope. For waveform display, the selected line is displayed first in a multiple waveform display, the selected line is displayed first in a multiple line display, and brightened in a field display. Alpha-numeric line display, and brightened in a field display. Alpha-numeric readout indicates the selected line and field on both CRTs. readout indicates the selected line and field on both CRTs. Additional line select information can be found in Section 3. Additional line select information can be found in Section 3. Full measurement functions are available in Line Select mode. Full measurement functions are available in Line Select mode. Large knob assignment is indicated by a circle, and is selected by Large knob assignment is indicated by a circle, and is selected by touching the line number area on the desired CRT screen. touching the line number area on the desired CRT screen.

2–6 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 2–6 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Connectors, Controls, Indicators Connectors, Controls, Indicators

Different lines can be displayed on the waveform and vector- Different lines can be displayed on the waveform and vector- scope CRTs, when that function is selected via the Line Select scope CRTs, when that function is selected via the Line Select menu by touching until is outlined. menu by touching until is outlined. For software versions 1.13 and up, installed in instruments SN For software versions 1.13 and up, installed in instruments SN B020100 and up: For ease in viewing the Timing Cursors while B020100 and up: For ease in viewing the Timing Cursors while in Line Select mode, the Timing Cursor dots are positioned on in Line Select mode, the Timing Cursor dots are positioned on the Voltage Cursors. Upon entering Line Select mode with the Voltage Cursors. Upon entering Line Select mode with Timing Cursors on, the Voltage Cursors are automatically Timing Cursors on, the Voltage Cursors are automatically enabled. enabled. For software versions 1.13 and up: A dual Line Select mode is For software versions 1.13 and up: A dual Line Select mode is available for making ICPM measurements when in Line Select. It available for making ICPM measurements when in Line Select. It is described in Section 4, under ICPM Measurement. is described in Section 4, under ICPM Measurement. 12. PHASE SHIFT. This switch enables the precision phase shift 12. PHASE SHIFT. This switch enables the precision phase shift measurements. Phase readout appears in the upper left corner of measurements. Phase readout appears in the upper left corner of the vectorscope CRT. This readout changes as the phase is the vectorscope CRT. This readout changes as the phase is _ _ _ _ shifted. For SCH operation, the phase ranges from 180 to 180 . shifted. For SCH operation, the phase ranges from 180 to 180 . For Vector, the configure menu offers a choice of two phase For Vector, the configure menu offers a choice of two phase ______displays: 180 to 180 or 0 to 360 . displays: 180 to 180 or 0 to 360 . 13. REFERENCE SET. This switch is used in Phase Shift, Voltage 13. REFERENCE SET. This switch is used in Phase Shift, Voltage Cursor, and Line Select modes. In Phase Shift, it stores the Cursor, and Line Select modes. In Phase Shift, it stores the currently displayed phase as a reference and resets the readout to currently displayed phase as a reference and resets the readout to 0.00. In Voltage Cursor mode with selected, it 0.00. In Voltage Cursor mode with selected, it stores the currently displayed voltage as a reference and resets stores the currently displayed voltage as a reference and resets the readout to 100% (0 dB). In Line Select mode, it is used to the readout to 100% (0 dB). In Line Select mode, it is used to access the vertical interval (line 19). access the vertical interval (line 19). 14. KNOB. The Precision Measurement control (large knob) operates 14. KNOB. The Precision Measurement control (large knob) operates with selected functions to provide continuous adjustment. with selected functions to provide continuous adjustment. 15. < > These switches operate with selected functions to provide 15. < > These switches operate with selected functions to provide single-step adjustment. The readout increments are the same as single-step adjustment. The readout increments are the same as those for the Precision Measurement Control. those for the Precision Measurement Control.

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 2–7 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 2–7 Connectors, Controls, Indicators Connectors, Controls, Indicators

Menu Access Switches Menu Access Switches

NOTE. Detailed menu information is located in Section 3. NOTE. Detailed menu information is located in Section 3.

16. PRESET. This switch provides access to the Preset menu screen, 16. PRESET. This switch provides access to the Preset menu screen, which allows the user to store, recall, and name up to 12 which allows the user to store, recall, and name up to 12 complete instrument setups. complete instrument setups. 17. MEASURE. This switch provides access to the Measurement 17. MEASURE. This switch provides access to the Measurement menu screen. Selections, made by touching the screen, are: DIFF menu screen. Selections, made by touching the screen, are: DIFF PHASE, DIFF GAIN, DP & DG, NOISE, ICPM, K FACTOR, PHASE, DIFF GAIN, DP & DG, NOISE, ICPM, K FACTOR, CHROMA/LUMA, SHORT TIME DISTORTION, RY SWEEP, CHROMA/LUMA, SHORT TIME DISTORTION, RY SWEEP, BOWTIE, and FSC TIME MARKS. Measure menu selections, BOWTIE, and FSC TIME MARKS. Measure menu selections, including user-modified instrument configuration, can be stored including user-modified instrument configuration, can be stored and recalled through the Preset menu. When a preset containing a and recalled through the Preset menu. When a preset containing a measurement mode is recalled, the instrument will automatically measurement mode is recalled, the instrument will automatically reenter that measurement mode. reenter that measurement mode. 18. CONFIGURE. This switch provides access to the Configure 18. CONFIGURE. This switch provides access to the Configure menu. This is a three-page menu; touch to sequence menu. This is a three-page menu; touch to sequence through the pages. Configure menu settings include units of through the pages. Configure menu settings include units of measure, probe input, DC restorer, int / ext graticules, 75% / measure, probe input, DC restorer, int / ext graticules, 75% / 100% color bars, calibrator amplitude, etc. 100% color bars, calibrator amplitude, etc. 19. CALIBRATE. This switch provides access to the Calibration 19. CALIBRATE. This switch provides access to the Calibration menu, which toggles between waveform and vectorscope when menu, which toggles between waveform and vectorscope when the buttons under the CRTs are pushed. Specified instrument the buttons under the CRTs are pushed. Specified instrument parameters can be set, using either the internal calibrator signal parameters can be set, using either the internal calibrator signal or an input signal for reference. or an input signal for reference. Waveform Calibrate menu selections are: CAL SIGNAL Waveform Calibrate menu selections are: CAL SIGNAL ON/OFF, VOLT CURSORS ZERO SET, CAL AMPL ZERO ON/OFF, VOLT CURSORS ZERO SET, CAL AMPL ZERO SET, HORIZ POS KNOB CAL, EXT HORIZ CAL, HORIZ SET, HORIZ POS KNOB CAL, EXT HORIZ CAL, HORIZ CAL, TRACE ROTATION, READOUT INTENSITY, and VERT CAL, TRACE ROTATION, READOUT INTENSITY, and VERT CAL. CAL. Vectorscope Calibrate menu selections are CAL OSC ON/OFF, Vectorscope Calibrate menu selections are CAL OSC ON/OFF, TRACE ROTATION, READOUT INTENSITY, and GAIN CAL. TRACE ROTATION, READOUT INTENSITY, and GAIN CAL.

2–8 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 2–8 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Connectors, Controls, Indicators Connectors, Controls, Indicators

Probe Probe 20. BNC Connector. This is the input connector for a X1 or X10 20. BNC Connector. This is the input connector for a X1 or X10 probe. probe. 21. CAL OUT. This pin jack outputs the calibration signal used to 21. CAL OUT. This pin jack outputs the calibration signal used to compensate the X10 probe. DC Restorer must be OFF (page 1 of compensate the X10 probe. DC Restorer must be OFF (page 1 of the Configure menu) and EXT REF must be selected. the Configure menu) and EXT REF must be selected.

Display Mode Display Mode Companion Switches. Some switch functions are paired or grouped so Companion Switches. Some switch functions are paired or grouped so that two or three switches determine one display. These are referred that two or three switches determine one display. These are referred to in this manual as companion switches. to in this manual as companion switches. Pushing the same companion switch twice in succession will change Pushing the same companion switch twice in succession will change its selection (as indicated by the LED). its selection (as indicated by the LED). A Held mode will be exited when its companion switch is pushed, A Held mode will be exited when its companion switch is pushed, and then the HELD switch is (momentarily) pushed again. The and then the HELD switch is (momentarily) pushed again. The switch setting will revert to the last selection before the Held mode switch setting will revert to the last selection before the Held mode was entered. was entered. Pushing first one companion switch and then another will cause the Pushing first one companion switch and then another will cause the display to alternate between the first switch selection and the second display to alternate between the first switch selection and the second switch selection. switch selection.

NOTE. Some switches may be locked out by menu selections. NOTE. Some switches may be locked out by menu selections.

Companion Switch Example. VECT / SCH and XY / PIX are used to Companion Switch Example. VECT / SCH and XY / PIX are used to select vectorscope CRT displays. select vectorscope CRT displays. Push and release the VECT/SCH switch to select Vector. It will Push and release the VECT/SCH switch to select Vector. It will require one or two pushes. require one or two pushes. Now push and release the XY / PIX switch to select XY. Now push and release the XY / PIX switch to select XY. Push the VECT / SCH switch. Note that it is restored to Vector. Push the VECT / SCH switch. Note that it is restored to Vector. Push the XY / PIX switch. Note that it is restored to XY. Push the XY / PIX switch. Note that it is restored to XY. Push the XY / PIX switch a second time. Now it toggles to PIX. Push the XY / PIX switch a second time. Now it toggles to PIX. Push the VECT / SCH switch twice. Now it toggles to SCH. Push the VECT / SCH switch twice. Now it toggles to SCH.

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 2–9 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 2–9 Connectors, Controls, Indicators Connectors, Controls, Indicators

Figure 2–2: Right side of front panel Figure 2–2: Right side of front panel

2–10 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 2–10 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Connectors, Controls, Indicators Connectors, Controls, Indicators

NOTE. The following switch groups are companion switches: NOTE. The following switch groups are companion switches: VECT / SCH & XY / PIX, PARADE / OVERLAY & WAVEFORM/ VECT / SCH & XY / PIX, PARADE / OVERLAY & WAVEFORM/ WFM + CAL. WFM + CAL. Refer to the preceding instructions entitled Companion Switch Refer to the preceding instructions entitled Companion Switch Example. Locations of the switches are shown in Figure 2–2. Example. Locations of the switches are shown in Figure 2–2.

22. VECT / SCH. Push and release this switch to toggle between 22. VECT / SCH. Push and release this switch to toggle between Vector and SCH phase display for the vectorscope CRT. Push and Vector and SCH phase display for the vectorscope CRT. Push and hold to access SCH phase and Vector together. hold to access SCH phase and Vector together. 23. XY / PIX. Push and release this switch to toggle between XY and 23. XY / PIX. Push and release this switch to toggle between XY and Picture Monitor display for the vectorscope CRT. Push and hold Picture Monitor display for the vectorscope CRT. Push and hold to add XY to the current VECT / SCH selection. Push and release to add XY to the current VECT / SCH selection. Push and release to exit held mode. to exit held mode. 24. PARADE / OVERLAY. Push and release this switch to toggle 24. PARADE / OVERLAY. Push and release this switch to toggle between Parade and Overlay modes. Possible configurations are between Parade and Overlay modes. Possible configurations are shown in Table 2–1. shown in Table 2–1.

Table 2–1: Possible Parade and Overlay Configurations Table 2–1: Possible Parade and Overlay Configurations

Display Possible Inputs * Automatic Selections Display Possible Inputs * Automatic Selections Parade No access beep sounds. If ONE LINE is selected in Overlay or Parade No access beep sounds. If ONE LINE is selected in Overlay or Wavef orm m o de, in st ru ment rev ert s to Wav efo rm mo de, in st ru ment rev ert s to ONE LINE TWO LINE or THREE LINE when ONE LINE TWO LINE or THREE LINE when Parade is selected. Parade is selected. TWO LINE CH A and Probe, or If CH B1, CH B2, and CH B3 are TWO LINE CH A and Probe, or If CH B1, CH B2, and CH B3 are CH B1 and Probe, or selected, the instrument will revert to CH B1 and Probe, or selected, the instrument will revert to CH A and CH B1, or THREE LINE mode. CH A and CH B1, or THREE LINE mode. CH B1 – CH B2 and CH B1 – CH B2 and CH B1 – CH B3 (Bow- CH B1 – CH B3 (Bow- tie) tie) THREE LINE CH B1 and CH B2 and If any combination of two input THREE LINE CH B1 and CH B2 and If any combination of two input CH B3 channels is selected, the instrument CH B3 channels is selected, the instrument will revert to TWO LINE mode. will revert to TWO LINE mode.

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 2–11 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 2–11 Connectors, Controls, Indicators Connectors, Controls, Indicators

Table 2–1: Possible Parade and Overlay Configurations (Cont.) Table 2–1: Possible Parade and Overlay Configurations (Cont.)

DisplayPossible Inputs * Automatic Selections DisplayPossible Inputs * Automatic Selections Overlay CH B1 and CH B2, or If TWO LINE or THREE LINE opera- Overlay CH B1 and CH B2, or If TWO LINE or THREE LINE opera- CdC3rCH B1 and CH B3, or tion is sel ect ed, in st ru ment will rev ert CCdC3rH B1 and CH B3, or tion is se le cted , ins tr ume nt will re v ert ONE LINE or CH B2 and CH B3, or to ONE LINE or FIELD operation ONE LINE or CH B2 and CH B3, or to ONE LINE or FIELD operation FIELD CH A and Probe, or when Overlay is selected. FIELD CH A and Probe, or when Overlay is selected. Probe and CH B1, or Probe and CH B1, or CH A and CH B1, or CH A and CH B1, or CH B1 and CH B2 and CH B1 and CH B2 and CH B3 CH B3 * Other combinations not permitted, and will cause a beep to sound. * Other combinations not permitted, and will cause a beep to sound.

25. WFM / WFM+CAL. Push and release this switch to toggle 25. WFM / WFM+CAL. Push and release this switch to toggle between standard waveform display and waveform plus calibrator between standard waveform display and waveform plus calibrator signal. signal.

Ref Ref 26. INT / EXT / CW. This switch toggles between an internal signal 26. INT / EXT / CW. This switch toggles between an internal signal (incoming video) and an external signal (rear-panel input) for (incoming video) and an external signal (rear-panel input) for sync and subcarrier reference. Push and hold this switch to select sync and subcarrier reference. Push and hold this switch to select the rear-panel CW input as a subcarrier reference. The LED will the rear-panel CW input as a subcarrier reference. The LED will indicate whether CW Sync has been set for internal or external indicate whether CW Sync has been set for internal or external (via the Configure menu, page 3). (via the Configure menu, page 3). 27. LINE / FIELD. Push and release to toggle between LINE and 27. LINE / FIELD. Push and release to toggle between LINE and FIELD. Line and Field combinations are limited only when in FIELD. Line and Field combinations are limited only when in Overlay and Parade modes. See Table 2–1. Overlay and Parade modes. See Table 2–1.

Wfm Horizontal Wfm Horizontal 28. ONE / TWO / THREE. Push and release to toggle between ONE 28. ONE / TWO / THREE. Push and release to toggle between ONE and TWO. Push and hold to select THREE. The Line and Field and TWO. Push and hold to select THREE. The Line and Field combinations are limited only when in Parade or Overlay mode, combinations are limited only when in Parade or Overlay mode, as shown in Table 2–1. as shown in Table 2–1.

Magnifier Magnifier 29. ON >. Push and release to turn on the magnifier, then push again 29. ON >. Push and release to turn on the magnifier, then push again to increase magnification. Push and hold to turn on the magnifier to increase magnification. Push and hold to turn on the magnifier

2–12 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 2–12 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Connectors, Controls, Indicators Connectors, Controls, Indicators

and continuously increase the magnification factor. Magnifica- and continuously increase the magnification factor. Magnifica- tion factors are shown in Table 2–2. tion factors are shown in Table 2–2.

Table 2–2: Waveform Magnification Table 2–2: Waveform Magnification

msec/Div msec/Div > Bu tton Magnification > Bu tton Magnif ication Setting Factor 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line Setting Factor 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line Off X1 5.0 ms 10.0 ms 15.0 ms Off X1 5.0 ms 10.0 ms 15.0 ms One Push X5 1.0 ms 2.0 ms 3.0 ms One Push X5 1.0 ms 2.0 ms 3.0 ms Two Pushes X10 0.50 ms 1.0 ms 1.50 ms Two Pushes X10 0.50 ms 1.0 ms 1.50 ms Three Pushes X20 0.25 ms 0.50 ms 0.75 ms Three Pushes X20 0.25 ms 0.50 ms 0.75 ms Four Pushes X25 0.20 ms 0.40 ms 0.60 ms Four Pushes X25 0.20 ms 0.40 ms 0.60 ms Five Pushes X50 0.10 ms 0. 20 ms 0.30 ms Five Pushes X50 0.10 ms 0. 20 ms 0.30 ms Six Pushes X100 0.05 ms 0.10 ms 0.15 ms Six Pushes X100 0.05 ms 0.10 ms 0.15 ms

30. OFF <. Push and release to decrease magnification (up to six 30. OFF <. Push and release to decrease magnification (up to six steps). Turns off the magnifier when pushed enough times, or steps). Turns off the magnifier when pushed enough times, or when held. when held. 31. VAR / SLOW (Switch). This switch toggles between Variable 31. VAR / SLOW (Switch). This switch toggles between Variable Sweep, Slow Sweep, and Off (calibrated sweep). Sweep, Slow Sweep, and Off (calibrated sweep). 32. SWEEP RATE (Control). Use the knob to control the sweep rate 32. SWEEP RATE (Control). Use the knob to control the sweep rate when VAR is selected, and sweep duration when SLOW is when VAR is selected, and sweep duration when SLOW is selected. VAR and SLOW control settings are saved and selected. VAR and SLOW control settings are saved and reinstated each time the mode is entered. To return to calibrated reinstated each time the mode is entered. To return to calibrated sweep, push the VAR/SLOW button until the red LEDs are off. sweep, push the VAR/SLOW button until the red LEDs are off.

Gain Gain 33. VAR / X5 (Switch). This switch controls the waveform monitor 33. VAR / X5 (Switch). This switch controls the waveform monitor vertical gain. Push and release to toggle through variable gain, vertical gain. Push and release to toggle through variable gain, X5 gain, and off. The waveform knob controls the amount of X5 gain, and off. The waveform knob controls the amount of variable gain when VAR is selected. Push and hold to enable both variable gain when VAR is selected. Push and hold to enable both X5 and Variable Gain. X5 and Variable Gain.

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 2–13 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 2–13 Connectors, Controls, Indicators Connectors, Controls, Indicators

34. WAVEFORM (Control). Use this knob to control the amount of 34. WAVEFORM (Control). Use this knob to control the amount of variable gain when VAR is selected. variable gain when VAR is selected. 35. VECTOR (Control). Use this knob to control the amount of 35. VECTOR (Control). Use this knob to control the amount of variable gain when VAR is selected. variable gain when VAR is selected. 36. VAR / MAX (Switch). Push and release this switch to turn on the 36. VAR / MAX (Switch). Push and release this switch to turn on the vectorscope variable gain, which is controlled by the Vector vectorscope variable gain, which is controlled by the Vector knob. Push and hold to disable the variable and set the vector- knob. Push and hold to disable the variable and set the vector- scope gains to maximum. scope gains to maximum.

Filter Filter

NOTE. The following switch groups are companion switches: AUX / NOTE. The following switch groups are companion switches: AUX / DIFF / LPASS & FLAT / LUM / CHROM DIFF / LPASS & FLAT / LUM / CHROM

Refer to the preceding instructions entitled Companion Switch Refer to the preceding instructions entitled Companion Switch Example. Example. 37. AUX / DIFF / LPASS. Push and release this switch to toggle 37. AUX / DIFF / LPASS. Push and release this switch to toggle through the following selections: Aux Video In (signal is input through the following selections: Aux Video In (signal is input after the video filters), Differentiated step (linearity steps are after the video filters), Differentiated step (linearity steps are translated into spikes for amplitude comparisons), and Low-pass translated into spikes for amplitude comparisons), and Low-pass filter (300 kHz bandwidth). filter (300 kHz bandwidth). 38. FLAT / LUM / CHROM. Push and release this switch to toggle 38. FLAT / LUM / CHROM. Push and release this switch to toggle through the following selections: Flat (unfiltered video signal), through the following selections: Flat (unfiltered video signal), Luminance ( filtered out), and Chrominance Luminance (chrominance filtered out), and Chrominance (luminance filtered out). Push and hold to select a multiple filter (luminance filtered out). Push and hold to select a multiple filter display, described in Table 2–3. display, described in Table 2–3.

Table 2–3: Multiple Filter Displays Table 2–3: Multiple Filter Displays

Display Possible Switch Settings Display Possible Switch Settings ONE LINE or FIELD Flat/Lum overlay. ONE LINE or FIELD Flat/Lum overlay. TWO LINE or FIELD Flat filtered displayed first (left portion of screen), then TWO LINE or FIELD Flat filtered displayed first (left portion of screen), then luminance filtered. luminance filtered. THREE LINE or FIELD Flat filtered displayed first, followed by luminance filtered THREE LINE or FIELD Flat filtered displayed first, followed by luminance filtered and chrominance filtered. and chrominance filtered.

2–14 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 2–14 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Connectors, Controls, Indicators Connectors, Controls, Indicators

NOTE. The three INPUT switches are companion switches. Refer to NOTE. The three INPUT switches are companion switches. Refer to the preceding Companion Switch Example. the preceding Companion Switch Example.

Input Input 39. A–B1 / B1–B2 / B1–B3. This switch selects from the following 39. A–B1 / B1–B2 / B1–B3. This switch selects from the following inputs for display: CH A minus CH B1, CH B1 minus CH B2, or inputs for display: CH A minus CH B1, CH B1 minus CH B2, or CH B1 minus CH B3. Push and hold this switch to select CH B1 CH B1 minus CH B3. Push and hold this switch to select CH B1 minus CH B2 and CH B1 minus CH B3 together (Bowtie). minus CH B2 and CH B1 minus CH B3 together (Bowtie). Instrument will be forced to 2-Line Parade operation. Instrument will be forced to 2-Line Parade operation. 40. CH B1 / CH B2 / CH B3. In WFM mode, push and release this 40. CH B1 / CH B2 / CH B3. In WFM mode, push and release this switch to select the rear-panel Channel B1, Channel B2, or switch to select the rear-panel Channel B1, Channel B2, or Channel B3 input for display on both CRTs. In Parade mode, all Channel B3 input for display on both CRTs. In Parade mode, all three are forced on. In Overlay, it selects any two or all three three are forced on. In Overlay, it selects any two or all three input channels on. Refer to Table 2–4 for an outline of possible input channels on. Refer to Table 2–4 for an outline of possible switch settings. switch settings.

Table 2–4: Possible CH B1, CH B2, CH B3 Switch Settings Table 2–4: Possible CH B1, CH B2, CH B3 Switch Settings

Display Possible Switch Settings Display Possible Switch Settings Overlay Toggles between 2 channels and all 3 channels on. Overlay Toggles between 2 channels and all 3 channels on. ONE LINE or FIELD ONE LINE or FIELD Waveform Toggles to select any one channel. Waveform Toggles to select any one channel. TWO LINE or FIELD TWO LINE or FIELD Parade CH B1, CH B2, and CH B3 on together Parade CH B1, CH B2, and CH B3 on together THREE LINE or FIELD THREE LINE or FIELD Waveform Toggles to select any one channel. Waveform Toggles to select any one channel. THREE LINE or FIELD THREE LINE or FIELD (Push & Hold) (Push & Hold)

41. CH A / PROBE. This switch selects the rear-panel Channel A 41. CH A / PROBE. This switch selects the rear-panel Channel A input or the front-panel Probe input for display on both CRTs. input or the front-panel Probe input for display on both CRTs. Upon entering the Probe mode, the following message appears: Upon entering the Probe mode, the following message appears: “PROBE– – 50V DC MAX.” “PROBE– – 50V DC MAX.”

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 2–15 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 2–15 Connectors, Controls, Indicators Connectors, Controls, Indicators

Rear Panel Connectors Rear Panel Connectors Connectors CH A, CH B1, CH B2, CH B3, EXT REF, and CW are Connectors CH A, CH B1, CH B2, CH B3, EXT REF, and CW are high impedance bridging loop-through inputs. CH A, CH B1, high impedance bridging loop-through inputs. CH A, CH B1, CH B2, and CH B3 have either a grounded or floating shield, CH B2, and CH B3 have either a grounded or floating shield, depending on the position of the grounding screw, which is located depending on the position of the grounding screw, which is located between the BNC connectors. between the BNC connectors. The following connector locations are shown in Figure 2–3. The following connector locations are shown in Figure 2–3. 1. CH A. CH A accepts composite or component video signals. 1. CH A. CH A accepts composite or component video signals. 2. CH B1. CH B1 accepts composite or component video signals. 2. CH B1. CH B1 accepts composite or component video signals. 3. CH B2. CH B2 accepts composite or component video signals. 3. CH B2. CH B2 accepts composite or component video signals. 4. CH B3. CH B3 accepts composite or component video signals. 4. CH B3. CH B3 accepts composite or component video signals. 5. XY INPUT. XY is a 15-pin D-type connector used as a high 5. XY INPUT. XY is a 15-pin D-type connector used as a high impedance input for the 600 W balanced audio. XY operation is impedance input for the 600 W balanced audio. XY operation is described in Section 3. The connector pinout is shown in Figure described in Section 3. The connector pinout is shown in Figure 3–5 on page 3–11. 3–5 on page 3–11. 6. EXT CW REF. CW connector accepts input for continuous 6. EXT CW REF. CW connector accepts input for continuous subcarrier signal. Provides an external phase reference signal. subcarrier signal. Provides an external phase reference signal. 7. LINE STRB OUT. LINE STRB OUT is a TTL output that 7. LINE STRB OUT. LINE STRB OUT is a TTL output that provides a negative-going pulse for the selected line(s) when provides a negative-going pulse for the selected line(s) when Line Select is used. When Line Select is off, the output level is Line Select is used. When Line Select is off, the output level is low. low. 8. AUX OUT. AUX OUT provides a 75 W video signal output 8. AUX OUT. AUX OUT provides a 75 W video signal output before filtering. AUX OUT can be used with the AUX IN to use before filtering. AUX OUT can be used with the AUX IN to use custom filters. custom filters. 9. PIX MON OUT. PIX MON OUT connector provides a 75 W 9. PIX MON OUT. PIX MON OUT connector provides a 75 W output to drive a picture monitor. The signal is output before output to drive a picture monitor. The signal is output before filtering, and has a bright-up pulse added when Line Select is filtering, and has a bright-up pulse added when Line Select is used. used. 10. AUX IN. AUX IN provides a 75 W input for video signals to the 10. AUX IN. AUX IN provides a 75 W input for video signals to the waveform monitor. Signal is inserted after the internal filters. waveform monitor. Signal is inserted after the internal filters. 11. EXT REF. External Reference connector accepts either 11. EXT REF. External Reference connector accepts either composite sync or black burst. composite sync or black burst.

2–16 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 2–16 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Connectors, Controls, Indicators Connectors, Controls, Indicators

Figure 2–3: Rear-Panel Connectors Figure 2–3: Rear-Panel Connectors

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 2–17 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 2–17 Connectors, Controls, Indicators Connectors, Controls, Indicators

12. EXT HORIZ. The EXT HORIZ input connector allows external 12. EXT HORIZ. The EXT HORIZ input connector allows external control of waveform monitor sweeps. A positive-going signal control of waveform monitor sweeps. A positive-going signal deflects the sweep from left to right. A 0 V to +5 V signal is deflects the sweep from left to right. A 0 V to +5 V signal is required for full scale deflection (ICPM). required for full scale deflection (ICPM). 13. SERIAL PORT. This 9-pin D-type connector provides a serial 13. SERIAL PORT. This 9-pin D-type connector provides a serial remote control interface, compatible with both RS232 and RS422 remote control interface, compatible with both RS232 and RS422 standards. Serial Port communications are described in Section 3. standards. Serial Port communications are described in Section 3. The connector pinout is shown in Figure 3–9 on page 3–18. The connector pinout is shown in Figure 3–9 on page 3–18. 14. REMOTE. This 15-pin D-type connector provides a ground 14. REMOTE. This 15-pin D-type connector provides a ground closure remote control interface and signal inputs for Remote closure remote control interface and signal inputs for Remote Sync and RGB/YRGB. Remote operation is described in Sync and RGB/YRGB. Remote operation is described in Section 3. The connector pinout is shown in Figure 3–8 on Section 3. The connector pinout is shown in Figure 3–8 on page 3–15. page 3–15.

2–18 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 2–18 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

Large Knob And Associated Switches Large Knob And Associated Switches Timing Cursors Timing Cursors Push the TIME switch to enable the timing cursors and obtain a Push the TIME switch to enable the timing cursors and obtain a menu on the vectorscope CRT. Use this menu to choose cursors that menu on the vectorscope CRT. Use this menu to choose cursors that track together or are positioned separately, and to choose between track together or are positioned separately, and to choose between locate and measure. locate and measure. When is selected by touching the is selected by touching the area of the screen, the large knob moves Cursor One or TRACK> area of the screen, the large knob moves Cursor One or Cursor Two, depending on which cursor is selected (outlined). When Cursor Two, depending on which cursor is selected (outlined). When is selected, the large knob moves both cursors at the is selected, the large knob moves both cursors at the same time. same time. The two cursors appear as bright-up portions of the waveform The two cursors appear as bright-up portions of the waveform display when is selected, or as bright-up dots when display when is selected, or as bright-up dots when is selected. The readout indicates the time difference is selected. The readout indicates the time difference between Cursor One and Cursor Two, in five nanosecond intervals. between Cursor One and Cursor Two, in five nanosecond intervals. If magnification or variable sweep is selected, the cursor interval is If magnification or variable sweep is selected, the cursor interval is magnified correspondingly. Time difference between Cursor One and magnified correspondingly. Time difference between Cursor One and Cursor Two can be determined, even though they may not both be on Cursor Two can be determined, even though they may not both be on screen at the same time. screen at the same time. To change the large knob assignment from one cursor to another, To change the large knob assignment from one cursor to another, touch the quadrant labeled . The current touch the quadrant labeled . The current assignment is outlined by a box. assignment is outlined by a box. Cursors appear to “wrap around” in One Line and Two Line sweeps Cursors appear to “wrap around” in One Line and Two Line sweeps because the total cursor range (160 ms) extends beyond the One or because the total cursor range (160 ms) extends beyond the One or Two Line sweep length. A beep sounds at both ends of the range. Two Line sweep length. A beep sounds at both ends of the range. Time difference between Cursor One and Cursor Two can be Time difference between Cursor One and Cursor Two can be determined, even though they may not both be on screen at the same determined, even though they may not both be on screen at the same time. time. Pushing REFERENCE SET has no effect while Timing cursors are Pushing REFERENCE SET has no effect while Timing cursors are enabled. enabled. Timing cursors are not valid in Field modes. Timing cursors are not valid in Field modes.

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–1 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–1 Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

For software versions 1.13 and up, installed in instruments SN For software versions 1.13 and up, installed in instruments SN B020100 and up: The Timing Cursor dots are positioned on the B020100 and up: The Timing Cursor dots are positioned on the Voltage Cursors while in Line Select mode, for ease in viewing the Voltage Cursors while in Line Select mode, for ease in viewing the Timing Cursors. Timing Cursors.

Voltage Cursors Voltage Cursors Push the VOLTAGE switch to enable the voltage cursors and obtain Push the VOLTAGE switch to enable the voltage cursors and obtain a menu on the vectorscope CRT. Use this menu to choose cursors a menu on the vectorscope CRT. Use this menu to choose cursors that track together or are positioned separately, and to choose that track together or are positioned separately, and to choose between absolute and relative readout. between absolute and relative readout. Cursor One appears as a dashed horizontal line, and Cursor Two as a Cursor One appears as a dashed horizontal line, and Cursor Two as a series of two short dashes on the waveform monitor display. series of two short dashes on the waveform monitor display. The large knob provides continuous adjustment of cursors. The < > The large knob provides continuous adjustment of cursors. The < > buttons provide adjustment in discrete steps of 0.1 IRE or 1mV buttons provide adjustment in discrete steps of 0.1 IRE or 1mV (depending on the Configure menu ABS UNITS selection). (depending on the Configure menu ABS UNITS selection). To change the large knob assignment from one cursor to another, To change the large knob assignment from one cursor to another, touch the quadrant labeled . The current touch the quadrant labeled . The current assignment is outlined by a box. assignment is outlined by a box. When is selected by touching the is selected by touching the area of the screen, the cursors are moved one at a time TRACK> area of the screen, the cursors are moved one at a time (currently selected cursor is outlined). When is selected, (currently selected cursor is outlined). When is selected, both cursors move at once. both cursors move at once. When is selected, the readout (in IRE or mV) When is selected, the readout (in IRE or mV) indicates the voltage difference between the two cursors. The mV / indicates the voltage difference between the two cursors. The mV / IRE selection is made through page 2 of the Configure menu. The IRE selection is made through page 2 of the Configure menu. The Configure menu instructions appear later in this section. Configure menu instructions appear later in this section. REFERENCE SET has no effect in Absolute mode. REFERENCE SET has no effect in Absolute mode. When is selected, the readout is shown in percent and When is selected, the readout is shown in percent and dB, relative to the value when REFERENCE SET was last pushed. dB, relative to the value when REFERENCE SET was last pushed. REFERENCE SET resets the relative value to 100.0% (0 dB). REFERENCE SET resets the relative value to 100.0% (0 dB). If vertical gain is employed, the cursor interval is magnified If vertical gain is employed, the cursor interval is magnified correspondingly. Voltage difference between Cursor One and Cursor correspondingly. Voltage difference between Cursor One and Cursor Two can be determined, even though they may not both be on screen Two can be determined, even though they may not both be on screen at the same time. at the same time.

3–2 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–2 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

For software versions 1.13 and up, installed in instruments For software versions 1.13 and up, installed in instruments SN B020100 and up: Voltage cursors are automatically enabled when SN B020100 and up: Voltage cursors are automatically enabled when in Line Select with Timing Cursors. in Line Select with Timing Cursors.

Line Select Line Select This switch enables the line select function, which is available for This switch enables the line select function, which is available for both waveform and vectorscope. For waveform display, the selected both waveform and vectorscope. For waveform display, the selected line is displayed first in a multiple line display, and brightened in a line is displayed first in a multiple line display, and brightened in a field display. Alpha-numeric readout indicates the selected line and field display. Alpha-numeric readout indicates the selected line and field on both CRTs. field on both CRTs. In software versions 1.11 and up, a 1 of 8 Field reference is In software versions 1.11 and up, a 1 of 8 Field reference is provided, for use with ghost-cancelling signals. In NTSC, the 8 Field provided, for use with ghost-cancelling signals. In NTSC, the 8 Field reference is built from two groups of 4 Fields. Touching will toggle between the two groups as a starting point for FIELD> will toggle between the two groups as a starting point for the 8 Field reference. the 8 Field reference. When 2 of 4 Field reference is selected, the area in the When 2 of 4 Field reference is selected, the area in the lower right corner of the screen will toggle between Fields 1 and 3 or lower right corner of the screen will toggle between Fields 1 and 3 or Fields 2 and 4; when 1 of 4 is chosen, it will allow selection of Field Fields 2 and 4; when 1 of 4 is chosen, it will allow selection of Field 1, 2, 3, or 4; and when 1 of 8 (present in software versions 1.11 and 1, 2, 3, or 4; and when 1 of 8 (present in software versions 1.11 and up) is chosen, it will allow selection of Field 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8. up) is chosen, it will allow selection of Field 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8. The selected field or field pair is boxed. When Fields is The selected field or field pair is boxed. When Fields is selected, the area is no longer present in the lower right selected, the area is no longer present in the lower right corner of the screen, and all fields are overlaid. corner of the screen, and all fields are overlaid. To enable the Line Select menu, first push the LINE SELECT To enable the Line Select menu, first push the LINE SELECT front-panel button, then touch on the vectorscope front-panel button, then touch on the vectorscope CRT until is outlined. To exit the menu, push the same area CRT until is outlined. To exit the menu, push the same area again until is outlined. again until is outlined. Line Select menu choices are shown in Figures 3–1 and 3–2. Touch Line Select menu choices are shown in Figures 3–1 and 3–2. Touch desired area to toggle between choices. Current selection is outlined desired area to toggle between choices. Current selection is outlined by a box. by a box. Touch or to display the selected Touch or to display the selected line (<1H>) or display the selected line plus the next 14 overlaid line (<1H>) or display the selected line plus the next 14 overlaid (<15 H>). (<15 H>).

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–3 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–3 Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

Figure 3–1: Line Select Menu Screen with <2 OF 4> Fields selected Figure 3–1: Line Select Menu Screen with <2 OF 4> Fields selected

The waveform and vectorscope CRTs can be used to display the The waveform and vectorscope CRTs can be used to display the same selected line or different lines. To display different lines, same selected line or different lines. To display different lines, enable the Line Select menu, then touch until enable the Line Select menu, then touch until is outlined. Be sure that both and is outlined. Be sure that both and show outlined. Touch again, so LSEL> show outlined. Touch again, so that is outlined and the menu is no longer displayed on the that is outlined and the menu is no longer displayed on the vectorscope CRT. vectorscope CRT. When different lines are displayed on waveform and vectorscope When different lines are displayed on waveform and vectorscope CRTs, touch the line number area on the desired CRT to change the CRTs, touch the line number area on the desired CRT to change the large knob assignment. This assignment is indicated by a circle. large knob assignment. This assignment is indicated by a circle. To display the same line on both CRTs, select and To display the same line on both CRTs, select and . The line number will be circled on both CRTs. . The line number will be circled on both CRTs.

3–4 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–4 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

Figure 3–2: Line Select Menu Screen with <1 OF 8> Fields selected Figure 3–2: Line Select Menu Screen with <1 OF 8> Fields selected

For software versions 1.13 and up: A dual Line Select mode is For software versions 1.13 and up: A dual Line Select mode is available for making ICPM measurements when in Line Select. It is available for making ICPM measurements when in Line Select. It is described in Section 4, under ICPM Measurement. described in Section 4, under ICPM Measurement.

Phase Shift Phase Shift This switch enables precision phase shift measurements. Phase This switch enables precision phase shift measurements. Phase readout appears in the upper left-hand corner of the vectorscope readout appears in the upper left-hand corner of the vectorscope CRT. CRT. This readout changes as the phase is shifted, indicating the degrees This readout changes as the phase is shifted, indicating the degrees of change since the phase reference was set. of change since the phase reference was set.

Reference Set Reference Set This switch is used in Phase Shift mode, to store displayed phase as a This switch is used in Phase Shift mode, to store displayed phase as a reference and reset the readout to 0.00; in Voltage Cursor mode with reference and reset the readout to 0.00; in Voltage Cursor mode with selected, to store the displayed voltage as a reference selected, to store the displayed voltage as a reference and reset the readout to 100%; and in Line Select mode to access the and reset the readout to 100%; and in Line Select mode to access the vertical interval (line 19). vertical interval (line 19).

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–5 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–5 Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

Knob Knob The Precision Measurement control (large knob) provides analog The Precision Measurement control (large knob) provides analog precision adjustments associated with the REFERENCE SET, LINE precision adjustments associated with the REFERENCE SET, LINE SELECT, PHASE, TIMING CURSOR, and VOLTAGE CURSOR SELECT, PHASE, TIMING CURSOR, and VOLTAGE CURSOR switches, or as assigned by menu selections. switches, or as assigned by menu selections. The current function of this knob is circled on the CRT screen. The current function of this knob is circled on the CRT screen.

< > Switches < > Switches The < > switches provide single-step increments. The readout The < > switches provide single-step increments. The readout increments are the same as those for the Precision Measurement increments are the same as those for the Precision Measurement Control readout. Push and release for an individual increment, or Control readout. Push and release for an individual increment, or push and hold to continue increments. push and hold to continue increments.

Graticules Graticules This section describes the basic vector and waveform graticule This section describes the basic vector and waveform graticule markings for both the 1780R (NTSC), and 1781R (PAL) instruments. markings for both the 1780R (NTSC), and 1781R (PAL) instruments.

Scale Illumination for Vector and Waveform Graticules Scale Illumination for Vector and Waveform Graticules The choice of internal or external graticule illumination is provided The choice of internal or external graticule illumination is provided on page 2 of the Configure menu. Refer to the Configure menu on page 2 of the Configure menu. Refer to the Configure menu instructions in this section. To adjust scale illumination, push the instructions in this section. To adjust scale illumination, push the button under the vectorscope or waveform CRT (to assign CRT button under the vectorscope or waveform CRT (to assign CRT controls to vectorscope or waveform), then adjust the SCALE controls to vectorscope or waveform), then adjust the SCALE control as desired. control as desired.

Using The Vector Graticule Using The Vector Graticule Basic Vector Graticule Markings. The NTSC Vector graticule is shown Basic Vector Graticule Markings. The NTSC Vector graticule is shown in Figure 3–3. The polar display permits measurements of hue in in Figure 3–3. The polar display permits measurements of hue in terms of the relative phase of the chrominance signal with respect to terms of the relative phase of the chrominance signal with respect to the color burst. Relative amplitude of chrominance to burst is the color burst. Relative amplitude of chrominance to burst is expressed in terms of the displacement from center (radial dimension expressed in terms of the displacement from center (radial dimension of amplitude) towards the color point which corresponds to 75% (or of amplitude) towards the color point which corresponds to 75% (or 100%) amplitude for the color being measured. 100%) amplitude for the color being measured.

3–6 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–6 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

Figure 3–3: 1780R Vector Graticule Figure 3–3: 1780R Vector Graticule

The graticule includes four burst amplitude marks: 75% with setup, The graticule includes four burst amplitude marks: 75% with setup, 75% with no setup, 100% with setup, and 100% with no setup. 75% with no setup, 100% with setup, and 100% with no setup. On the NTSC graticule, each chrominance vector terminates in a On the NTSC graticule, each chrominance vector terminates in a system of graticule targets in the form of two boxes (a small box system of graticule targets in the form of two boxes (a small box inside a large box). The dimensions of the large boxes represent inside a large box). The dimensions of the large boxes represent _ _ ±10 centered on the exact chrominance phase, and ±20% of ±10 centered on the exact chrominance phase, and ±20% of chrominance amplitude centered around 100% of standard chrominance amplitude centered around 100% of standard _ _ amplitude. The dimensions of the smaller boxes represent ±2.5 and amplitude. The dimensions of the smaller boxes represent ±2.5 and ±2.5 IRE. ±2.5 IRE. The PAL Vector graticule is shown in Figure 3–4. On the PAL The PAL Vector graticule is shown in Figure 3–4. On the PAL graticule, each chrominance vector related to the +V burst terminates graticule, each chrominance vector related to the +V burst terminates in targets that are in the shape of two boxes (a small box inside a in targets that are in the shape of two boxes (a small box inside a _ _ large box). The dimensions of the large box represent ±10 centered large box). The dimensions of the large box represent ±10 centered on the exact chrominance phase and ±20% of chrominance on the exact chrominance phase and ±20% of chrominance

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–7 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–7 Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

amplitude centered around 100% standard amplitude. The dimen- amplitude centered around 100% standard amplitude. The dimen- _ _ sions of the smaller inner target represent ±3 and ±5% of chromi- sions of the smaller inner target represent ±3 and ±5% of chromi- nance amplitude. Note that the chrominance vectors associated with nance amplitude. Note that the chrominance vectors associated with the –V burst are terminated in the smaller targets only. the –V burst are terminated in the smaller targets only.

Figure 3–4: 1781R Vector Graticule Figure 3–4: 1781R Vector Graticule

On the NTSC graticule, the small marks at intervals along the I and On the NTSC graticule, the small marks at intervals along the I and Q axes denote the amplitudes of the chrominance components. On Q axes denote the amplitudes of the chrominance components. On the PAL graticule, the small marks at intervals along the U and V the PAL graticule, the small marks at intervals along the U and V axes denote the amplitudes of the U and V chrominance components. axes denote the amplitudes of the U and V chrominance components. The horizontal and vertical axes of the vector graticule contain The horizontal and vertical axes of the vector graticule contain markings for checking Vector mode bandwidth. A subcarrier markings for checking Vector mode bandwidth. A subcarrier frequency sine wave whose amplitude places it on the outer compass frequency sine wave whose amplitude places it on the outer compass rose is used as a reference. When the frequency is changed, the rose is used as a reference. When the frequency is changed, the diameter of the circle should reduce. At a point equal to 70% of full diameter of the circle should reduce. At a point equal to 70% of full

3–8 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–8 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

amplitude (3 dB), there are gaps in the horizontal and vertical axes. amplitude (3 dB), there are gaps in the horizontal and vertical axes. This calibration aid makes it possible to check the –3 dB points of This calibration aid makes it possible to check the –3 dB points of the demodulator output amplifiers. the demodulator output amplifiers. Differential Gain and Phase Measurements. The 1780R-Series provides Differential Gain and Phase Measurements. The 1780R-Series provides differential gain and phase measurements through the Measurement differential gain and phase measurements through the Measurement menu, accessed by pushing the front-panel MEASURE button. menu, accessed by pushing the front-panel MEASURE button. Instructions are given in Section 4. Instructions are given in Section 4. The 1780R-Series vector graticule is the same as the 1720-Series The 1780R-Series vector graticule is the same as the 1720-Series vector graticule, and provides differential gain and phase markings, vector graticule, and provides differential gain and phase markings, so that approximate 1780R-Series measurements can also be made in so that approximate 1780R-Series measurements can also be made in the same way as with the 1720. Differential gain (dG) and differen- the same way as with the 1720. Differential gain (dG) and differen- tial phase (dF) measurements can be made using the graticule tial phase (dF) measurements can be made using the graticule markings located at the outer edge of the B–Y axis (NTSC) or U axis markings located at the outer edge of the B–Y axis (NTSC) or U axis (PAL). (PAL). Differential gain appears as an elongation of the chrominance dot. Differential gain appears as an elongation of the chrominance dot. Measure the horizontal distance from end to end. Minor graticule Measure the horizontal distance from end to end. Minor graticule divisions represent 5% error, and major divisions represent 10%. divisions represent 5% error, and major divisions represent 10%. Differential Phase appears as a vectorial offset of the chrominance Differential Phase appears as a vectorial offset of the chrominance dot. Measure angular difference, using the Differential Phase dot. Measure angular difference, using the Differential Phase graticule markings along the edge of the compass rose. Measuring graticule markings along the edge of the compass rose. Measuring _ _ from the 0 mark on the B–Y or U axis, each minor division from the 0 mark on the B–Y or U axis, each minor division _ _ _ _ represents 2 of error, the major divisions represent 10 , and the represents 2 of error, the major divisions represent 10 , and the _ _ dashed lines half-way in between represent 5 of Differential Phase dashed lines half-way in between represent 5 of Differential Phase error. error. XY Measurements. The 1780R-Series vectorscope graticule contains XY Measurements. The 1780R-Series vectorscope graticule contains markings for measuring stereo audio phase and amplitude. The markings for measuring stereo audio phase and amplitude. The dashed diagonal line is the measurement axis for errors less than dashed diagonal line is the measurement axis for errors less than _ _ 90 , and is terminated in amplitude targets that correspond to the 90 , and is terminated in amplitude targets that correspond to the length of the X and Y axes. These target boxes, in the upper right length of the X and Y axes. These target boxes, in the upper right and lower left of the display, correspond to amplitude errors of 1/2 and lower left of the display, correspond to amplitude errors of 1/2 and 1 dB. and 1 dB. _ _ The upper half of the Y axis has markings in 10 increments for The upper half of the Y axis has markings in 10 increments for measuring the separation of the Lissajous. Both X and Y axes have measuring the separation of the Lissajous. Both X and Y axes have –3 dB markings, making it easy to check the bandpass of the –3 dB markings, making it easy to check the bandpass of the amplifiers. The 3 dB points are minor breaks in the line about 30% amplifiers. The 3 dB points are minor breaks in the line about 30% of the distance from the graticule circle to the graticule center. of the distance from the graticule circle to the graticule center.

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–9 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–9 Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

XY INPUT Connector. The rear-panel XY INPUT connector is a 15-pin, XY INPUT Connector. The rear-panel XY INPUT connector is a 15-pin, sub-miniature, D-type connector that provides input to the sub-miniature, D-type connector that provides input to the Horizontal and Vertical (X and Y) Amplifiers. They are balanced Horizontal and Vertical (X and Y) Amplifiers. They are balanced (differential), DC-coupled, high impedance (>20 kW), un-terminated (differential), DC-coupled, high impedance (>20 kW), un-terminated inputs provided for audio applications. If AC coupling is desired, inputs provided for audio applications. If AC coupling is desired, external capacitors are required. These inputs are factory calibrated external capacitors are required. These inputs are factory calibrated for 0 dBm in 600 W but can be adjusted for any 600 W system for 0 dBm in 600 W but can be adjusted for any 600 W system between 0 and 12 dBm. See Figure 3–5. between 0 and 12 dBm. See Figure 3–5. 0 dBm is equal to 1 mW or 2.19 V peak-to-peak in 600 W. 12 dBm is 0 dBm is equal to 1 mW or 2.19 V peak-to-peak in 600 W. 12 dBm is equal to 15.8 mW or 8.72 V peak-to-peak in 600 W. equal to 15.8 mW or 8.72 V peak-to-peak in 600 W. To calibrate the 1780R-Series for a system other than 0 dBm, To calibrate the 1780R-Series for a system other than 0 dBm, perform step 38 of the Adjustment Procedure in the 1780R-Series perform step 38 of the Adjustment Procedure in the 1780R-Series Service Manual, using a 1 kHz sine wave of the appropriate Service Manual, using a 1 kHz sine wave of the appropriate amplitude. amplitude. Inputs can be driven single-ended by driving either the + or – X and Inputs can be driven single-ended by driving either the + or – X and Y inputs with the opposite polarity inputs grounded. Y inputs with the opposite polarity inputs grounded. In addition, a single-ended, high-gain mode can be used for other, In addition, a single-ended, high-gain mode can be used for other, primarily non-audio, applications. It can be accessed by installing primarily non-audio, applications. It can be accessed by installing plug jumpers on J108 and J205 (on the Vectorscope board, see plug jumpers on J108 and J205 (on the Vectorscope board, see Table 3–1) and inputting the signal on the +X and +Y inputs with the Table 3–1) and inputting the signal on the +X and +Y inputs with the –X and –Y inputs grounded. –X and –Y inputs grounded.

Table 3–1: Plug Jumpers for Vectorscope Board Table 3–1: Plug Jumpers for Vectorscope Board

Jumper Jumper Number Name Plug Position Purpose Number Name Plug Position Purpose { { J108 X Input Gain Removed X gain is normal J108 X Input Gain Removed X gain is normal

Installed X gain is in High Gain Installed X gain is in High Gain position position { { J205 Y Input Gain Removed Y gain is normal J205 Y Input Gain Removed Y gain is normal

Installed Y gain is in High Gain Installed Y gain is in High Gain position position { { Factory installed position. Factory installed position.

3–10 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–10 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

Pin Number Function Pin Number Function 8 8 15 1 –X Input 15 1 –X Input 2 No Connection 2 No Connection 3 +X Input 3 +X Input 4 No Connection 4 No Connection 5 –Y Input 5 –Y Input 6 No Connection 6 No Connection 9 7 +Y Input 9 7 +Y Input 1 1 8 No Connection 8 No Connection 9 –X Input 9 –X Input 10 Ground 10 Ground 11 +X High Gain Input 11 +X High Gain Input 12 Ground 12 Ground 13 –Y Input 13 –Y Input 14 No Connection 14 No Connection 15 +Y High Gain Input 15 +Y High Gain Input

Figure 3–5: Rear-panel X–Y Connector Pin Assignments Figure 3–5: Rear-panel X–Y Connector Pin Assignments

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–11 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–11 Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

Using The Waveform Graticule Using The Waveform Graticule Basic Waveform Graticule Markings. The two basic 1780R-Series Basic Waveform Graticule Markings. The two basic 1780R-Series internal waveform graticules are the NTSC and PAL graticules. The internal waveform graticules are the NTSC and PAL graticules. The NTSC graticule is shown in Figure 3–6, and the PAL graticule is NTSC graticule is shown in Figure 3–6, and the PAL graticule is shown in Figure 3–7. External graticules (short time distortion for shown in Figure 3–7. External graticules (short time distortion for NTSC and CCIR / K-factor for PAL) are also available in full scale NTSC and CCIR / K-factor for PAL) are also available in full scale and in a 3% reduced photo version. and in a 3% reduced photo version.

Figure 3–6: 1780R Waveform Graticule Figure 3–6: 1780R Waveform Graticule

3–12 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–12 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

Figure 3–7: 1781R Waveform Graticule Figure 3–7: 1781R Waveform Graticule

Graticule horizontal scales are divided into 12.7 divisions along the Graticule horizontal scales are divided into 12.7 divisions along the horizontal line at . The vertical graduations are scaled horizontal line at blanking level. The vertical graduations are scaled according to measuring units and ranges unique to each system – mV according to measuring units and ranges unique to each system – mV for the CCIR graticule, and IRE units and percent for for the CCIR graticule, and IRE units and percent modulation for NTSC. A mV scale has been added to the NTSC graticule to NTSC. A mV scale has been added to the NTSC graticule to facilitate component measurements. The graticules are also marked facilitate component measurements. The graticules are also marked for K-factor tolerances and linear-distortion measurements. for K-factor tolerances and linear-distortion measurements. Line-time distortion-NTSC. Line-time distortion is measured using the Line-time distortion-NTSC. Line-time distortion is measured using the graticule box labeled L.D. = 2%, 5%. Any test signal that contains graticule box labeled L.D. = 2%, 5%. Any test signal that contains an 18 ms, 100 IRE bar can be used. To make a measurement, select a an 18 ms, 100 IRE bar can be used. To make a measurement, select a one-line sweep and use the two arrows on the 50 IRE line to position one-line sweep and use the two arrows on the 50 IRE line to position the bar horizontally. Make sure that the blanking level of the the bar horizontally. Make sure that the blanking level of the waveform is on the baseline, and that the bar top passes through waveform is on the baseline, and that the bar top passes through 100 IRE at its midpoint. (It may be necessary to use the variable gain 100 IRE at its midpoint. (It may be necessary to use the variable gain control to normalize the gain.) The box excludes the first and last ms control to normalize the gain.) The box excludes the first and last ms

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–13 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–13 Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

of the bar. Use the ±2% and ±5% graticule marks to quantify the of the bar. Use the ±2% and ±5% graticule marks to quantify the peak-to-peak deviation of the bar top (tilt or rounding) within the peak-to-peak deviation of the bar top (tilt or rounding) within the structure. The vertical gain can be increased to measure small errors. structure. The vertical gain can be increased to measure small errors. (When the X5 setting is selected, the graticule marks correspond to (When the X5 setting is selected, the graticule marks correspond to ±0.4% and ±1%.) ±0.4% and ±1%.) Line-time distortion measurements can also be made using the Line-time distortion measurements can also be made using the voltage cursors in the RELATIVE mode. Define the amplitude voltage cursors in the RELATIVE mode. Define the amplitude difference between blanking level and the bar center as 100%. Now difference between blanking level and the bar center as 100%. Now move both of the cursors to measure the peak-to-peak tilt. This move both of the cursors to measure the peak-to-peak tilt. This number is the line-time distortion. Remember to ignore the first and number is the line-time distortion. Remember to ignore the first and last ms of the bar. The time cursors can be used to locate the last ms of the bar. The time cursors can be used to locate the appropriate time interval in the center of the bar. Set the time appropriate time interval in the center of the bar. Set the time separation to 16 ms, and put the time cursors in the TRACK mode. separation to 16 ms, and put the time cursors in the TRACK mode. Move the two cursors together until they are centered on the bar. Move the two cursors together until they are centered on the bar. Line-time distortion-PAL. Line-time distortion in PAL systems is Line-time distortion-PAL. Line-time distortion in PAL systems is measured with a signal that contains a 10 ms or 25 ms white bar. The measured with a signal that contains a 10 ms or 25 ms white bar. The measurement methods given here quote the maximum departure of measurement methods given here quote the maximum departure of the bar top from the level at the center of the line bar as the amount the bar top from the level at the center of the line bar as the amount of distortion, but they can be adapted for peak-to-peak measure- of distortion, but they can be adapted for peak-to-peak measure- ments. To make a measurement, measure the maximum deviation ments. To make a measurement, measure the maximum deviation from the center of the bar, and express that number as a percentage from the center of the bar, and express that number as a percentage of the level at bar center. The variable gain can be used to normalize of the level at bar center. The variable gain can be used to normalize the center of the bar to 500 or 1000 mV. Deviations in the top of the the center of the bar to 500 or 1000 mV. Deviations in the top of the bar can then be read directly off the graticule in percent. Ignore the bar can then be read directly off the graticule in percent. Ignore the first and last ms of the bar. first and last ms of the bar. Line-time distortion measurements can also be made using the Line-time distortion measurements can also be made using the voltage cursors in the RELATIVE mode. Define the amplitude voltage cursors in the RELATIVE mode. Define the amplitude difference between blanking level and the bar center as 100%. Leave difference between blanking level and the bar center as 100%. Leave one cursor at the bar center, and move the other cursor to measure one cursor at the bar center, and move the other cursor to measure the peak positive and peak negative deviations in the top of the bar. the peak positive and peak negative deviations in the top of the bar. The largest of these numbers (ignore the sign) is the amount of The largest of these numbers (ignore the sign) is the amount of line-time distortion. The time cursors can be used to locate the line-time distortion. The time cursors can be used to locate the appropriate time interval in the center of the bar. Set the time appropriate time interval in the center of the bar. Set the time separation to the bar time (usually 10 ms or 25 ms) minus 2 ms. Put separation to the bar time (usually 10 ms or 25 ms) minus 2 ms. Put the time cursors in the TRACK mode, and move the two cursors the time cursors in the TRACK mode, and move the two cursors together until they are centered on the bar. together until they are centered on the bar.

3–14 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–14 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

Remote Operation Remote Operation REMOTE Connector REMOTE Connector The rear-panel REMOTE connector is a subminiature 15-pin D-type The rear-panel REMOTE connector is a subminiature 15-pin D-type receptacle with female contacts. All the active Remote control lines receptacle with female contacts. All the active Remote control lines are enabled by remote ground closures or TTL levels (0 V to are enabled by remote ground closures or TTL levels (0 V to +0.8 V). Pin assignments for the REMOTE connector are shown in +0.8 V). Pin assignments for the REMOTE connector are shown in Figure 3–8 and Table 3–2. The REMOTE connector appears in the Figure 3–8 and Table 3–2. The REMOTE connector appears in the 1780R-Series Service Manual, Section 11, UART and A/D 1780R-Series Service Manual, Section 11, UART and A/D Schematic Diagram. Schematic Diagram.

Figure 3–8: REMOTE Connector Pin Assignments Figure 3–8: REMOTE Connector Pin Assignments

Remote Operation Remote Operation 1. Connect the mating male plug supplied with the instrument to a 1. Connect the mating male plug supplied with the instrument to a remote-box cable. remote-box cable. 2. Remote lines named Presets 1 through 8 correspond to the 2. Remote lines named Presets 1 through 8 correspond to the front-panel Preset menu Presets 1 through 8. These remote lines front-panel Preset menu Presets 1 through 8. These remote lines allow configurations already stored at Presets 1 through 8 to be allow configurations already stored at Presets 1 through 8 to be recalled, and new configurations to be stored at those preset recalled, and new configurations to be stored at those preset locations. locations.

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–15 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–15 Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

a. To recall a preset, force the corresponding remote line a. To recall a preset, force the corresponding remote line low. low. b. To store a front-panel configuration at a preset location, b. To store a front-panel configuration at a preset location, apply a low first to the Store line (pin 11) and then to the apply a low first to the Store line (pin 11) and then to the desired preset. Alternately, the Store line and desired desired preset. Alternately, the Store line and desired preset line may be forced low simultaneously. preset line may be forced low simultaneously.

Table 3–2: Remote Pin Functions Table 3–2: Remote Pin Functions

Pin Name Function Pin Name Function 1 RGB Staircase Input 1 MW input impedance to ground. Requires 10 V 1 RGB Staircase Input 1 MW input impedance to ground. Requires 10 V staircase signal. staircase signal. 2 / RGB Enable Low = RGB Enable. Routes the signal on pin 1 to the 2 / RGB Enable Low = RGB Enable. Routes the signal on pin 1 to the Horizontal amplifier, where it is added to the ramps Horizontal amplifier, where it is added to the ramps from the Ramp Generator. from the Ramp Generator. In RGB mode, the Ramp Generator reduces the In RGB mode, the Ramp Generator reduces the ramp to 1/3 or 1/4 size (selected by A2J585). ramp to 1/3 or 1/4 size (selected by A2J585). 3 NC 3 NC 4 / Remote Sync Enable Low = Remote Sync Enable. INT / EXT Reference 4 / Remote Sync Enable Low = Remote Sync Enable. INT / EXT Reference turned off, and instrument sync provided by the turned off, and instrument sync provided by the signal on pin 10. signal on pin 10. 5 / Preset 2 Low with Pin 11 High = Recall Preset 2. 5 / Preset 2 Low with Pin 11 High = Recall Preset 2. Low with Pin 11 Low = Store current F/P settings at Low with Pin 11 Low = Store current F/P settings at Preset 2 location. Preset 2 location. 6 / Preset 3 Low with Pin 11 High = Recall Preset 3. 6 / Preset 3 Low with Pin 11 High = Recall Preset 3. Low with Pin 11 Low = Store current F/P settings at Low with Pin 11 Low = Store current F/P settings at Preset 3 location. Preset 3 location. 7 / Preset 1 Low with Pin 11 High = Recall Preset 1. 7 / Preset 1 Low with Pin 11 High = Recall Preset 1. Low with Pin 11 Low = Store current F/P settings at Low with Pin 11 Low = Store current F/P settings at Preset 1 location. Preset 1 location. 8 / Preset 4 Low with Pin 11 High = Recall Preset 4. 8 / Preset 4 Low with Pin 11 High = Recall Preset 4. Low with Pin 11 Low = Store current F/P settings at Low with Pin 11 Low = Store current F/P settings at Preset 4 location. Preset 4 location.

3–16 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–16 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

Table 3–2: Remote Pin Functions (Cont.) Table 3–2: Remote Pin Functions (Cont.)

PinName Function PinName Function 9 Ground 9 Ground 10 Remote Sync Input 5 kW input impedance to ground. Polarity set by 10 Remote Sync Input 5 kW input impedance to ground. Polarity set by jumper A2J192. Factory set for positive polarity. jumper A2J192. Factory set for positive polarity. 11 / Store Low = Store. 11 / Store Low = Store. Used with pin 5, 6, 7, 8, 12, 13, 14, or 15. Used with pin 5, 6, 7, 8, 12, 13, 14, or 15. 12 / Preset 8 Low with Pin 11 High = Recall Preset 8. 12 / Preset 8 Low with Pin 11 High = Recall Preset 8. Low with Pin 11 Low = Store current F/P settings at Low with Pin 11 Low = Store current F/P settings at Preset 8 location. Preset 8 location. 13 / Preset 5 Low with Pin 11 High = Recall Preset 5. 13 / Preset 5 Low with Pin 11 High = Recall Preset 5. Low with Pin 11 Low = Store current F/P settings at Low with Pin 11 Low = Store current F/P settings at Preset 5 location. Preset 5 location. 14 / Preset 6 Low with Pin 11 High = Recall Preset 6. 14 / Preset 6 Low with Pin 11 High = Recall Preset 6. Low with Pin 11 Low = Store current F/P settings at Low with Pin 11 Low = Store current F/P settings at Preset 6 location. Preset 6 location. 15 / Preset 7 Low with Pin 11 High = Recall Preset 7. 15 / Preset 7 Low with Pin 11 High = Recall Preset 7. Low with Pin 11 Low = Store current F/P settings at Low with Pin 11 Low = Store current F/P settings at Preset 7 location. Preset 7 location.

3. All front-panel controls operate in their usual manner during 3. All front-panel controls operate in their usual manner during remote operation, so remote selections may be changed with the remote operation, so remote selections may be changed with the front-panel controls. front-panel controls. a. For a remote selection to be effective once it has been a. For a remote selection to be effective once it has been deselected with the front-panel control, it is either selected deselected with the front-panel control, it is either selected again with the front-panel control, or the ground closure is again with the front-panel control, or the ground closure is removed and reattached. removed and reattached. b. Front-panel LED indicators light to show the current b. Front-panel LED indicators light to show the current selection. selection.

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–17 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–17 Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

Serial Communications Interface Serial Communications Interface Serial Interface Connector Serial Interface Connector The rear-panel SERIAL interface connector is a 9-pin, sub-minia- The rear-panel SERIAL interface connector is a 9-pin, sub-minia- ture, D-type connector. It is used as an RS422A or RS232D interface ture, D-type connector. It is used as an RS422A or RS232D interface to the 1780R-Series microcontroller. Drivers for both interfaces are to the 1780R-Series microcontroller. Drivers for both interfaces are resident. RS422A is a balanced voltage digital interface, and resident. RS422A is a balanced voltage digital interface, and RS232D is a serial binary data interchange. Figure 3–9 shows the RS232D is a serial binary data interchange. Figure 3–9 shows the rear-panel SERIAL connector pin assignments. rear-panel SERIAL connector pin assignments.

Figure 3–9: Serial Interface Connector Pin Assignments Figure 3–9: Serial Interface Connector Pin Assignments

Building a Wiring Converter Building a Wiring Converter Wiring converters can be built to connect the 1780R-Series 9-pin Wiring converters can be built to connect the 1780R-Series 9-pin SERIAL port with another 9-pin connector or with a 25-pin SERIAL port with another 9-pin connector or with a 25-pin connector. The 25-pin converter uses a 9-pin male connector connector. The 25-pin converter uses a 9-pin male connector (Tektronix P/N 131-1007-00) and a 25-pin female connector (Tektronix P/N 131-1007-00) and a 25-pin female connector (Tektronix P/N 131-0971-00), as illustrated in Figure 3–10. (Tektronix P/N 131-0971-00), as illustrated in Figure 3–10.

3–18 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–18 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

9-Pin Male Connector 9-Pin Male Connector

Figure 3–10: Serial Interface Connector Wiring Converter Figure 3–10: Serial Interface Connector Wiring Converter

Serial Remote Information Serial Remote Information 1780R-Series instrument configurations can be stored at (and 1780R-Series instrument configurations can be stored at (and retrieved from) a remote location. To accomplish this, the 1780R-Se- retrieved from) a remote location. To accomplish this, the 1780R-Se- ries is connected to a host computer through a serial port that ries is connected to a host computer through a serial port that supports RS-232 or RS-422 standards. supports RS-232 or RS-422 standards. All front-panel controls operate in their usual manner during remote All front-panel controls operate in their usual manner during remote operation, so remote selections may be changed with the front-panel operation, so remote selections may be changed with the front-panel controls. Front-panel LED indicators light to show the current controls. Front-panel LED indicators light to show the current selection. selection. Commands to the 1780R-Series and its responses are listed in Tables Commands to the 1780R-Series and its responses are listed in Tables 3–3 and 3–4. 3–3 and 3–4.

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–19 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–19 Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

Table 3–3: Serial Remote Commands to the 1780R-Series Table 3–3: Serial Remote Commands to the 1780R-Series

Command* Function Results Command* Function Results #U or #u UPLOAD 1780R-Series sends a stream of data, representing #U or #u UPLOAD 1780R-Series sends a stream of data, representing the current instrument configuration, to the host the current instrument configuration, to the host computer. computer. #D or #d DOWNLOAD 1780R-Series expects a stream of data representing #D or #d DOWNLOAD 1780R-Series expects a stream of data representing an instrument configuration of the same form that was an instrument configuration of the same form that was uploaded. uploaded. #P or #p PARTIAL 1780R-Series expects a stream of data representing #P or #p PARTIAL 1780R-Series expects a stream of data representing DOWNLOAD an instrument configuration, with the knob settings DOWNLOAD an instrument configuration, with the knob settings (focus, intensity, etc.) not affected. (focus, intensity, etc.) not affected. * The # character indicates a remote control command. The 1780R-Series * The # character indicates a remote control command. The 1780R-Series ignores all transmissions until this character is received. ignores all transmissions until this character is received.

Table 3–4: 1780R-Series Responses Table 3–4: 1780R-Series Responses

Command Description Command Description A The transmission was successful (ACK) A The transmission was successful (ACK) C Command not known. (The # character was received, but was not followed C Command not known. (The # character was received, but was not followed by a U, u, D, d, P, or p. ) by a U, u, D, d, P, or p. ) D Bad data received (all expected data consists of ASCII printable D Bad data received (all expected data consists of ASCII printable characters.) characters.) H Bad internal checksum. H Bad internal checksum. N Bad transmission checksum (NACK) N Bad transmission checksum (NACK) T Timed out (the process took too long to complete). T Timed out (the process took too long to complete). V Software version number mismatch. V Software version number mismatch.

Serial data format: 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity. Serial data format: 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity. Baud rates supported are: 300, 1200, 9600, 19200. The baud rate Baud rates supported are: 300, 1200, 9600, 19200. The baud rate selection is made through page 3 of the Configure menu, with further selection is made through page 3 of the Configure menu, with further instructions later in this section. instructions later in this section.

3–20 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–20 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

The data stream transmitted to and from the host (representing the The data stream transmitted to and from the host (representing the current 1780R-Series settings) consists of 512 bytes, followed by a current 1780R-Series settings) consists of 512 bytes, followed by a one-byte checksum. All data bytes are in the range of Hex 20 to Hex one-byte checksum. All data bytes are in the range of Hex 20 to Hex 7F, so that they are printable ASCII characters. 7F, so that they are printable ASCII characters.

SCH Display SCH Display

NOTE. Switch function is further described in Section 2. NOTE. Switch function is further described in Section 2.

Figure 3–11: Portion of the 1780R-Series Front Panel Figure 3–11: Portion of the 1780R-Series Front Panel

With the 1780R-Series, there are two methods of viewing SCH Phase With the 1780R-Series, there are two methods of viewing SCH Phase errors; the method outlined here, utilizing the front-panel SCH errors; the method outlined here, utilizing the front-panel SCH button, and FSC Time Marks through the Measurement Menu. button, and FSC Time Marks through the Measurement Menu. INT REF setting: two dots appear on the vectorscope compass rose. INT REF setting: two dots appear on the vectorscope compass rose. The dots represent the 50% points of H Sync. The dots represent the 50% points of H Sync.

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–21 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–21 Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

EXT REF setting: only one dot appears on the vectorscope compass EXT REF setting: only one dot appears on the vectorscope compass rose. This relative mode allows the comparison of the color framing rose. This relative mode allows the comparison of the color framing of two signals. The two signals are color framed when the sync dot is of two signals. The two signals are color framed when the sync dot is _ _ within 90 of the burst vector. within 90 of the burst vector.

SCH Phase Measurement Procedure SCH Phase Measurement Procedure 1. Select the SCH mode of operation by pushing the SCH / VECT 1. Select the SCH mode of operation by pushing the SCH / VECT button, shown in Figure 3–11, until the SCH LED lights. Two button, shown in Figure 3–11, until the SCH LED lights. Two pushes may be required, depending on the previous condition. pushes may be required, depending on the previous condition. 2. Push the front-panel PHASE button. 2. Push the front-panel PHASE button. 3. Apply a signal to a 1780R-Series input channel and select that 3. Apply a signal to a 1780R-Series input channel and select that channel for display. channel for display. _ _ 4. Use the large knob to align the burst vector with the 180 4. Use the large knob to align the burst vector with the 180 graticule line (normal position). Push the REF SET button to graticule line (normal position). Push the REF SET button to _ _ obtain a 0.00 readout (vectorscope CRT). obtain a 0.00 readout (vectorscope CRT). 5. Use the large knob to move the dot (or closest of the two dots in 5. Use the large knob to move the dot (or closest of the two dots in _ _ INT REF mode) to the 180 graticule line. Readout now shows INT REF mode) to the 180 graticule line. Readout now shows SCH Phase error. SCH Phase error. 6. Push the SCH and PHASE buttons again to exit the mode. 6. Push the SCH and PHASE buttons again to exit the mode.

3–22 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–22 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

Parade Operation Parade Operation

NOTE. Switch function is further described in Section 2. NOTE. Switch function is further described in Section 2.

Select the Parade mode of operation by pushing the PARADE/ Select the Parade mode of operation by pushing the PARADE/ OVERLAY button, shown in Figure 3–11, until the Parade LED OVERLAY button, shown in Figure 3–11, until the Parade LED lights. Two pushes may be required, depending on the previous lights. Two pushes may be required, depending on the previous condition. condition. If One Line or Field is currently selected, instrument operation will If One Line or Field is currently selected, instrument operation will be forced to Two Line or Field. be forced to Two Line or Field.

Two Line or Field Parade Two Line or Field Parade Parade mode simultaneously displays two signals side by side on the Parade mode simultaneously displays two signals side by side on the CRT. CRT. Pushing the CH A/PROBE switch will select from the following Pushing the CH A/PROBE switch will select from the following input channel combinations for side-by-side display: input channel combinations for side-by-side display: CH A and CH B1 CH A and CH B1 CH A and PROBE CH A and PROBE CH B1 and PROBE CH B1 and PROBE Pushing the CH A–CH B1 / CH B1–CH B2 / CH B1–CH B3 switch Pushing the CH A–CH B1 / CH B1–CH B2 / CH B1–CH B3 switch selects CH B1–CH B2 and CH B1–CH B3. selects CH B1–CH B2 and CH B1–CH B3. Pushing the CH B1 / CH B2 / CH B3 switch forces the instrument to Pushing the CH B1 / CH B2 / CH B3 switch forces the instrument to Three Line. Three Line.

Three Line Display Three Line Display The CH B1 / CH B2 / CH B3 switch provides a side-by-side display The CH B1 / CH B2 / CH B3 switch provides a side-by-side display of these three inputs. of these three inputs. Pushing a two-channel input switch forces the instrument to Two Pushing a two-channel input switch forces the instrument to Two Line. Line.

Offset Menu Offset Menu When only B input channels are displayed in Parade or Overlay, an When only B input channels are displayed in Parade or Overlay, an offset readout appears on the waveform CRT, as shown in Fig- offset readout appears on the waveform CRT, as shown in Fig- ure 3–12. ure 3–12.

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–23 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–23 Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

Figure 3–12: Offsets Menu Screen Figure 3–12: Offsets Menu Screen

To obtain Offset menu, touch until is To obtain Offset menu, touch until is outlined. outlined. Touch until is outlined, and touch CHB2 or Touch until is outlined, and touch CHB2 or CHB3 to assign large knob function to desired offset. Large knob CHB3 to assign large knob function to desired offset. Large knob assignment will be circled. assignment will be circled. Using the large knob, adjust offset of the selected display with Using the large knob, adjust offset of the selected display with respect to the other display or displays. respect to the other display or displays.

DC Level Measurements DC Level Measurements The 1780R-Series has the capability of indicating the DC levels of The 1780R-Series has the capability of indicating the DC levels of the B1, B2, and B3 channels with a high degree of accuracy. This is the B1, B2, and B3 channels with a high degree of accuracy. This is useful when adjusting the DC levels of RGB signals coming from a useful when adjusting the DC levels of RGB signals coming from a CCU, for example. The following procedure details the DC CCU, for example. The following procedure details the DC measurement technique for Parade mode. measurement technique for Parade mode.

3–24 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–24 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

DC Level Measurement Procedure DC Level Measurement Procedure 1. Enter the Parade mode. Press the CONFIGURE button and then 1. Enter the Parade mode. Press the CONFIGURE button and then use the vectorscope touch screen to select under the use the vectorscope touch screen to select under the area. Press the CH B1 / CH B2 / CH B3 switch to area. Press the CH B1 / CH B2 / CH B3 switch to go to Three Line. go to Three Line. 2. Ensure that the button under the WFM CRT is selected. Adjust 2. Ensure that the button under the WFM CRT is selected. Adjust the VERT POS control to set the CH B1 (far left) trace to a the VERT POS control to set the CH B1 (far left) trace to a convenient reference line on the graticule. Setting the WAVE- convenient reference line on the graticule. Setting the WAVE- FORM GAIN to X5 provides increased resolution. Touch FORM GAIN to X5 provides increased resolution. Touch until is outlined. until is outlined. 3. Touch until is outlined, and touch 3. Touch until is outlined, and touch to assign large knob function to that channel. to assign large knob function to that channel. 4. Use the large knob to align CH B2 with CH B1. 4. Use the large knob to align CH B2 with CH B1. 5. Touch and use the large knob to align CH B3 with 5. Touch and use the large knob to align CH B3 with CH B1. CH B1. 6. Turn off the OFFSET MENU and change the 6. Turn off the OFFSET MENU and change the from to . Press the CONFIGURE button to return from to . Press the CONFIGURE button to return to the normal operating mode. to the normal operating mode. 7. The DC levels of all three signals can now be read directly from 7. The DC levels of all three signals can now be read directly from the graticule. (For NTSC graticules, one IRE = 7.142857 mV.) the graticule. (For NTSC graticules, one IRE = 7.142857 mV.)

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–25 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–25 Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

Overlay Operation Overlay Operation

NOTE. Switch function is further described in Section 2. NOTE. Switch function is further described in Section 2.

Select the Overlay mode of operation by pushing the PARADE/ Select the Overlay mode of operation by pushing the PARADE/ OVERLAY button, shown in Figure 3–11, until the Overlay LED OVERLAY button, shown in Figure 3–11, until the Overlay LED lights. Two pushes may be required, depending on the previous lights. Two pushes may be required, depending on the previous condition. condition. The instrument is forced to One Line operation. Two and Three Line The instrument is forced to One Line operation. Two and Three Line modes are locked out; a beep sounds if the switch is pushed. The modes are locked out; a beep sounds if the switch is pushed. The LINE/FIELD switch is still operational. LINE/FIELD switch is still operational.

Overlaid Displays Overlaid Displays The CH A/PROBE switch will select from the following input The CH A/PROBE switch will select from the following input channel combinations for overlaid display: channel combinations for overlaid display: CH A and CH B1 CH A and CH B1 CH A and PROBE CH A and PROBE CH B1 and PROBE CH B1 and PROBE Subtract modes (A–B1 / B1–B2 / B1–B3 switch) are unavailable in Subtract modes (A–B1 / B1–B2 / B1–B3 switch) are unavailable in Overlay mode. Overlay mode. The CH B1 / CH B2 / CH B3 switch provides an overlaid display of The CH B1 / CH B2 / CH B3 switch provides an overlaid display of any two, or all three of these inputs. any two, or all three of these inputs.

Offset Menu Offset Menu When only B input channels are displayed, an offset readout appears When only B input channels are displayed, an offset readout appears in the upper right corner of the waveform CRT. in the upper right corner of the waveform CRT. To obtain the Offset menu, touch until is To obtain the Offset menu, touch until is outlined. outlined. Touch until is outlined, and touch or Touch until is outlined, and touch or to assign large knob function to desired offset. (If only two to assign large knob function to desired offset. (If only two input channels are selected, the menu will only provide one offset.) input channels are selected, the menu will only provide one offset.) Using the large knob, adjust offset of the selected display with Using the large knob, adjust offset of the selected display with respect to the other two displays. respect to the other two displays.

3–26 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–26 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

WFM + CAL WFM + CAL

NOTE. Switch function is further described in Section 2. NOTE. Switch function is further described in Section 2.

Enter WFM+CAL Mode Enter WFM+CAL Mode Select the WFM+CAL mode of operation by pushing the WFM / Select the WFM+CAL mode of operation by pushing the WFM / WFM+CAL button, shown in Figure 3–11, until the WFM+CAL WFM+CAL button, shown in Figure 3–11, until the WFM+CAL LED lights. Two pushes may be required, depending on the previous LED lights. Two pushes may be required, depending on the previous condition. condition. The WFM+CAL display appears on the right CRT. Sample readouts The WFM+CAL display appears on the right CRT. Sample readouts are shown in Figures 3–13 and 3–14. are shown in Figures 3–13 and 3–14.

General WFM+CAL Information General WFM+CAL Information The WFM+CAL mode provides an accurate measurement tool, The WFM+CAL mode provides an accurate measurement tool, which can be used to measure such things as burst amplitude, sync which can be used to measure such things as burst amplitude, sync tip to white bar amplitude, and color bar amplitude. tip to white bar amplitude, and color bar amplitude. The WFM+CAL signal consists of a video signal superimposed on a The WFM+CAL signal consists of a video signal superimposed on a calibrator signal. The video signal is displayed twice, with one calibrator signal. The video signal is displayed twice, with one display offset from the other by the voltage level of the calibrator. display offset from the other by the voltage level of the calibrator. When operating in the mode, the large knob will vary the When operating in the mode, the large knob will vary the Calibrator amplitude, allowing accurate amplitude measurement Calibrator amplitude, allowing accurate amplitude measurement over a continuous range; when operating in , it will not. Fixed over a continuous range; when operating in , it will not. Fixed Calibrator amplitude is selected on page 1 of the Configure menu. Calibrator amplitude is selected on page 1 of the Configure menu.

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–27 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–27 Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

Right CRT display Right CRT display

Figure 3–13: WFM + CAL Readout with ABS selected Figure 3–13: WFM + CAL Readout with ABS selected

Right CRT display Right CRT display

Figure 3–14: WFM + CAL Readout with REL selected Figure 3–14: WFM + CAL Readout with REL selected

3–28 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–28 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

When operating in the mode, software versions 1.11 & Up When operating in the mode, software versions 1.11 & Up provide a choice of absolute or relative readouts. When is provide a choice of absolute or relative readouts. When is selected, the readout appears in IRE or mV. (For an IRE readout, selected, the readout appears in IRE or mV. (For an IRE readout, must be selected on page 2 of the Configure menu.) When must be selected on page 2 of the Configure menu.) When is selected, the readout is given in both dB and percentage is selected, the readout is given in both dB and percentage (%) values, relative to a reference that is selected by pushing the (%) values, relative to a reference that is selected by pushing the REF SET button. (Software versions below 1.11 provide a relative REF SET button. (Software versions below 1.11 provide a relative readout only.) readout only.) Making Measurements Using VAR and ABS. This mode provides accurate Making Measurements Using VAR and ABS. This mode provides accurate amplitude measurements in IRE or mV values. An example of the amplitude measurements in IRE or mV values. An example of the readout is shown in Figure 3–13 (calibrator signal not shown). readout is shown in Figure 3–13 (calibrator signal not shown). 1. Enter the WFM+CAL mode. Use the touch screen to select 1. Enter the WFM+CAL mode. Use the touch screen to select and . Select Two Line sweep and Flat filter. and . Select Two Line sweep and Flat filter. Apply a color bar signal to the 1780R-Series. Apply a color bar signal to the 1780R-Series. 2. To measure the signal amplitude (sync tip to white bar), locate 2. To measure the signal amplitude (sync tip to white bar), locate the sync tip on the topmost of the two displays. Use the large the sync tip on the topmost of the two displays. Use the large knob to vertically align the bottom of that sync tip with the white knob to vertically align the bottom of that sync tip with the white bar of the bottom display. The CAL readout now displays sync bar of the bottom display. The CAL readout now displays sync tip to white bar amplitude. X5 Gain can be used if desired. tip to white bar amplitude. X5 Gain can be used if desired. 3. To measure burst amplitude, locate the burst on the top display. 3. To measure burst amplitude, locate the burst on the top display. Use the large knob to vertically align the bottom of that burst Use the large knob to vertically align the bottom of that burst with the top of the lower display’s burst packet. The CAL readout with the top of the lower display’s burst packet. The CAL readout now displays burst amplitude. now displays burst amplitude. 4. Any feature of the waveform can be measured in the same 4. Any feature of the waveform can be measured in the same manner; use the large knob to align the bottom of the desired manner; use the large knob to align the bottom of the desired feature with the top of the second appearance of that same feature with the top of the second appearance of that same feature. This provides a readout of the voltage offset between the feature. This provides a readout of the voltage offset between the two displays. two displays. Making Measurements Using VAR and REL. This mode provides relative Making Measurements Using VAR and REL. This mode provides relative measurements in dB and percent. An example of the readout is measurements in dB and percent. An example of the readout is shown in Figure 3–14 (calibrator signal not shown). shown in Figure 3–14 (calibrator signal not shown). 1. Enter the WFM+CAL mode. Use the touch screen to select 1. Enter the WFM+CAL mode. Use the touch screen to select and . Select Two Line sweep and Flat filter. and . Select Two Line sweep and Flat filter. Apply a color bar signal to the 1780R-Series. Apply a color bar signal to the 1780R-Series.

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–29 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–29 Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

2. Use the large knob to align a horizontal reference point (usually 2. Use the large knob to align a horizontal reference point (usually the sync tip) of one display with the white bar of the second the sync tip) of one display with the white bar of the second display. display. 3. Push the REF SET button and obtain a CAL readout of 0.00 dB 3. Push the REF SET button and obtain a CAL readout of 0.00 dB and 100.0%. and 100.0%. 4. Relative burst amplitude is measured in the same manner as 4. Relative burst amplitude is measured in the same manner as absolute (see step 3 of the preceding procedure). The CAL absolute (see step 3 of the preceding procedure). The CAL readout will display the burst amplitude in dB and % of the total readout will display the burst amplitude in dB and % of the total signal amplitude. signal amplitude. 5. The relative amplitude of any portion of the signal can be 5. The relative amplitude of any portion of the signal can be measured in the same manner: use the large knob to align the measured in the same manner: use the large knob to align the bottom of the desired feature with the top of the second bottom of the desired feature with the top of the second appearance of that same feature. The relative readouts are appearance of that same feature. The relative readouts are provided in dB and percent (%) of total signal amplitude. provided in dB and percent (%) of total signal amplitude. Using FIX. The 1780R-Series large knob has no effect in the Using FIX. The 1780R-Series large knob has no effect in the mode. mode. This mode is used to compare the amplitude of the incoming video This mode is used to compare the amplitude of the incoming video signal to several internally calibrated amplitudes. signal to several internally calibrated amplitudes. 1. Enter the WFM+CAL mode. Use the touch screen to select 1. Enter the WFM+CAL mode. Use the touch screen to select . Select 2 Line and Flat filter. Apply a color bar signal to . Select 2 Line and Flat filter. Apply a color bar signal to the 1780R-Series. the 1780R-Series. 2. For NTSC, if an IRE readout is desired, be sure that is 2. For NTSC, if an IRE readout is desired, be sure that is selected on page 1 of the Configure menu. selected on page 1 of the Configure menu. 3. Select the calibrator signal amplitude on page 1 of the Calibrate 3. Select the calibrator signal amplitude on page 1 of the Calibrate menu. menu. 4. Adjust the amplitude of the incoming video signal until the CAL 4. Adjust the amplitude of the incoming video signal until the CAL readout reflects the exact amplitude selected in step 3. readout reflects the exact amplitude selected in step 3. a. When using the calibrator setting of 1000 mV (140.0 a. When using the calibrator setting of 1000 mV (140.0 IRE), the CAL readout should equal that value when the IRE), the CAL readout should equal that value when the sync tip of one display is aligned with the white bar of the sync tip of one display is aligned with the white bar of the second display. second display. b. When using the calibrator setting of 714 mV (100.0 IRE) b. When using the calibrator setting of 714 mV (100.0 IRE) for NTSC, or 700 mV for PAL, the CAL readout should for NTSC, or 700 mV for PAL, the CAL readout should

3–30 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–30 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

equal that value when the back porch of one display is equal that value when the back porch of one display is aligned with the white bar of the second display. aligned with the white bar of the second display. c. The 700 mV (98.0 IRE) calibrator amplitude (NTSC and c. The 700 mV (98.0 IRE) calibrator amplitude (NTSC and PAL) can be used to adjust component levels for PAL) can be used to adjust component levels for component video. component video. d. The 300 mV (PAL) calibrator amplitude is used for d. The 300 mV (PAL) calibrator amplitude is used for adjusting sync amplitudes. adjusting sync amplitudes.

Menu Information Menu Information

Figure 3–15: Left Side of Front Panel, showing Menu Buttons and Touch Figure 3–15: Left Side of Front Panel, showing Menu Buttons and Touch Screen Screen

Menu Documentation Overview Menu Documentation Overview This section describes the Password, Preset, Calibrate, Configure, This section describes the Password, Preset, Calibrate, Configure, and Measure menus. and Measure menus.

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–31 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–31 Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

Many selections are made by touching the desired word on the CRT Many selections are made by touching the desired word on the CRT screen, as shown in Figure 3–15. This is indicated by the use of the screen, as shown in Figure 3–15. This is indicated by the use of the word ‘touch’ (as opposed to ‘push’ for front-panel switches). word ‘touch’ (as opposed to ‘push’ for front-panel switches). The touch screen menu quadrants are illustrated as a documentation The touch screen menu quadrants are illustrated as a documentation tool, and do not actually appear on the CRT screen. If adjustment of tool, and do not actually appear on the CRT screen. If adjustment of quadrants is necessary, refer to the 1780R-Series Service Manual. quadrants is necessary, refer to the 1780R-Series Service Manual.

Menu Access Menu Access The Preset, Measure, Configure, and Calibrate menus are enabled by The Preset, Measure, Configure, and Calibrate menus are enabled by four front-panel menu buttons, shown in Figure 3–15. four front-panel menu buttons, shown in Figure 3–15. Access to the Preset and Calibrate menus can be restricted by Access to the Preset and Calibrate menus can be restricted by password. password. Password operation is enabled / disabled by a setting of S385 on the Password operation is enabled / disabled by a setting of S385 on the MPU board. Instrument is shipped in the not enabled position. Refer MPU board. Instrument is shipped in the not enabled position. Refer to the 1780R-Series Service Manual for the location of S385. to the 1780R-Series Service Manual for the location of S385. The Preset, Measure, and Configure menus are shown on the left The Preset, Measure, and Configure menus are shown on the left CRT, with the vectorscope display blanked. CRT, with the vectorscope display blanked. The Calibrate menu is available for both vectorscope and waveform, The Calibrate menu is available for both vectorscope and waveform, selected by pushing the button under the desired CRT. selected by pushing the button under the desired CRT. The green LED in the button lights when a menu is enabled. The green LED in the button lights when a menu is enabled. To exit a menu, push the same menu button again. Menus will also To exit a menu, push the same menu button again. Menus will also be exited when another menu button is pushed, with the exception be exited when another menu button is pushed, with the exception that both the Preset and the Measure menu can be active at the same that both the Preset and the Measure menu can be active at the same time. time.

Touch Screen Touch Screen Both CRTs are equipped with touch screens. Four vertical and four Both CRTs are equipped with touch screens. Four vertical and four horizontal divisions create 16 quadrants, shown in Figure 3–16. horizontal divisions create 16 quadrants, shown in Figure 3–16. Touching a quadrant enables the function or toggles between choices Touching a quadrant enables the function or toggles between choices displayed in that quadrant. displayed in that quadrant. Current selections / functions are outlined by a box. Current large Current selections / functions are outlined by a box. Current large knob assignment is circled. knob assignment is circled.

3–32 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–32 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

Figure 3–16: Touch Screen 4 X 4 Matrix Figure 3–16: Touch Screen 4 X 4 Matrix

The touch screens are light sensitive, so it is not necessary to apply The touch screens are light sensitive, so it is not necessary to apply pressure. pressure. If it is necessary to adjust quadrant center points, refer to the If it is necessary to adjust quadrant center points, refer to the 1780R-Series Service Manual. 1780R-Series Service Manual.

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–33 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–33 Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

Password Menu Password Menu

Figure 3–17: Password Menu Screen Figure 3–17: Password Menu Screen

Enable / Disable the Password Enable / Disable the Password To enable password operation, place button #2 of S385 (MPU board) To enable password operation, place button #2 of S385 (MPU board) in the closed position. Turn the instrument power to standby and in the closed position. Turn the instrument power to standby and back to on for the microprocessor to recognize the new switch back to on for the microprocessor to recognize the new switch setting. Disable in the same manner, placing button #2 in the open setting. Disable in the same manner, placing button #2 in the open position. position.

Define the Password Define the Password The first time a restricted access menu is selected after the jumper The first time a restricted access menu is selected after the jumper has been moved, the words are displayed has been moved, the words are displayed on screen. on screen. Select the three-digit password, by touching the desired sequence of Select the three-digit password, by touching the desired sequence of numbers on the CRT screen (choose from the displayed numbers 1, numbers on the CRT screen (choose from the displayed numbers 1,

3–34 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–34 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

2, 3, and 4). That password is then stored, and remains in memory, 2, 3, and 4). That password is then stored, and remains in memory, even when the instrument power is turned to standby and back to on. even when the instrument power is turned to standby and back to on.

Change the Password Change the Password Move button #2 of S385 (MPU board) to the open position to disable Move button #2 of S385 (MPU board) to the open position to disable password operation. password operation. Apply power to the instrument. Apply power to the instrument. Follow preceding instructions to Enable the Password and Define the Follow preceding instructions to Enable the Password and Define the Password. Password.

Use the Password Use the Password Once password is enabled, it restricts access to the Preset and Once password is enabled, it restricts access to the Preset and Calibrate menus, and the Password menu, shown in Figure 3–17, is Calibrate menus, and the Password menu, shown in Figure 3–17, is displayed. displayed. To access Name, Store, or Calibrate menu functions, touch the To access Name, Store, or Calibrate menu functions, touch the numbers on the screen in proper sequence to form the password. numbers on the screen in proper sequence to form the password. Once Name, Store, or Calibrate are selected, entering the correct Once Name, Store, or Calibrate are selected, entering the correct password will provide access to the desired menu. password will provide access to the desired menu.

Incorrect Password Incorrect Password Entering an incorrect password produces a momentary display Entering an incorrect password produces a momentary display informing the user of denied access and exits the Name, Store, or informing the user of denied access and exits the Name, Store, or Calibrate menu screen. These menu screens can also be exited by Calibrate menu screen. These menu screens can also be exited by pushing the PRESET or CALIBRATE button again, or by disabling pushing the PRESET or CALIBRATE button again, or by disabling the Password according to the preceding instructions. the Password according to the preceding instructions.

NOTE. If the operator has reduced the Readout Intensity via the NOTE. If the operator has reduced the Readout Intensity via the Calibrate menu, then attempts to exit and re-enter that menu, the Calibrate menu, then attempts to exit and re-enter that menu, the Password menu may not be visible, and instrument functions may Password menu may not be visible, and instrument functions may appear to be locked up. Temporarily returning the instrument to appear to be locked up. Temporarily returning the instrument to non-password operation will allow re-entry of the Calibrate menu. non-password operation will allow re-entry of the Calibrate menu.

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–35 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–35 Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

Preset Menu Preset Menu

Figure 3–18: Preset Menu Screen Figure 3–18: Preset Menu Screen

Recall Recall Recall Preset Settings. Push PRESET button to enter Preset menu, Recall Preset Settings. Push PRESET button to enter Preset menu, shown in Figure 3–18. shown in Figure 3–18. Recall desired preset by touching the preset name. Recall desired preset by touching the preset name. Example: . Example: . Instrument is reset to configuration stored under that preset, menu Instrument is reset to configuration stored under that preset, menu screen disappears, and selected preset name is displayed in the upper screen disappears, and selected preset name is displayed in the upper right of the vectorscope CRT. right of the vectorscope CRT. While the Preset LED is still on, pushing it will cancel the recall. While the Preset LED is still on, pushing it will cancel the recall. The LED is turned off by any front-panel activity. The LED is turned off by any front-panel activity.

3–36 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–36 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

If a Measure menu selection (for example, user-modified R–Y If a Measure menu selection (for example, user-modified R–Y SWEEP setup) has been stored at a Preset location, recalling it will SWEEP setup) has been stored at a Preset location, recalling it will cause the instrument to reenter the stored measurement mode (R–Y cause the instrument to reenter the stored measurement mode (R–Y SWEEP in this example), turning on both Preset and Measure LEDs. SWEEP in this example), turning on both Preset and Measure LEDs. Exit Preset Menu. Use one of these two methods to exit the Preset Exit Preset Menu. Use one of these two methods to exit the Preset menu: menu: 1. Exit by pushing the front-panel PRESET menu button, and the 1. Exit by pushing the front-panel PRESET menu button, and the instrument returns to its previous settings. instrument returns to its previous settings. 2. Exit by changing any right-side front-panel control, and the 2. Exit by changing any right-side front-panel control, and the instrument continues to operate at the selected preset settings instrument continues to operate at the selected preset settings (allowing modifications by the operator). When the preset has (allowing modifications by the operator). When the preset has been exited in this manner, the word will be been exited in this manner, the word will be displayed at the bottom of the menu screen the next time the displayed at the bottom of the menu screen the next time the Preset menu is selected, as shown in Figure 3–18. Touch Preset menu is selected, as shown in Figure 3–18. Touch to return to previous instrument settings. to return to previous instrument settings. Presets 1 through 8 can also be accessed by ground closures through Presets 1 through 8 can also be accessed by ground closures through the rear-panel REMOTE connector. the rear-panel REMOTE connector. Recall Initial Settings. Push PRESET button to enter Preset menu. Recall Initial Settings. Push PRESET button to enter Preset menu. Touch . Instrument will be reset to the settings shown in Touch . Instrument will be reset to the settings shown in Table 3–5. Table 3–5.

Table 3–5: Initial Settings Table 3–5: Initial Settings

Control Setting Control Setting Control Setting Control Setting LEFT DISPLAY Vector REFERENCE Int LEFT DISPLAY Vector REFERENCE Int RIGHT DISPLAY Wfm CW SYNC Ext RIGHT DISPLAY Wfm CW SYNC Ext FOCUS, SCALE, INTENS Mid range FILTER FLAT FOCUS, SCALE, INTENS Mid range FILTER FLAT VECT / WFM H & V POS Approximate Center WFM SWEEPS 2H, VECT / WFM H & V POS Approximate Center WFM SWEEPS 2H, screen MAG Off screen MAG Off INPUT CH A BARS 75% INPUT CH A BARS 75% GAINS Calibrated DC REST Slow GAINS Calibrated DC REST Slow READOUTS On SYNC DIR READOUTS On SYNC DIR GRATICULE Int CAL AMPL FIX GRATICULE Int CAL AMPL FIX

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–37 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–37 Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

Table 3–5: Initial Settings (Cont.) Table 3–5: Initial Settings (Cont.)

ControlSetting Control Setting ControlSetting Control Setting COUPLING AC BEEP On COUPLING AC BEEP On FIELD TRIG F1 BAUD RATE 9600 FIELD TRIG F1 BAUD RATE 9600 SLOW SWEEP TRIG + PROBE GAIN X1 SLOW SWEEP TRIG + PROBE GAIN X1 FRONT INPUT HI Z CLAMP BP FRONT INPUT HI Z CLAMP BP VECTOR PAL (1781R only) ABS UNITS IRE (1780R) VECTOR PAL (1781R only) ABS UNITS IRE (1780R) mV (1781R) mV (1781R)

The Preset menu LED will stay on until the menu is exited. The Preset menu LED will stay on until the menu is exited. is displayed in the upper right portion of the CRT. is displayed in the upper right portion of the CRT. Exit Initial Settings. Use one of these two methods to exit the Preset Exit Initial Settings. Use one of these two methods to exit the Preset menu: menu: 1. Exit by pushing the front-panel PRESET menu button, and the 1. Exit by pushing the front-panel PRESET menu button, and the instrument returns to its previous settings. instrument returns to its previous settings. 2. Exit by changing any right-side front-panel control, and the 2. Exit by changing any right-side front-panel control, and the instrument continues to operate at the Initial settings (allowing instrument continues to operate at the Initial settings (allowing modifications by the operator). modifications by the operator).

Recover Recover only appears on the CRT after: only appears on the CRT after: 1. Preset menu is entered. 1. Preset menu is entered. 2. Initial or Preset setting is recalled. 2. Initial or Preset setting is recalled. 3. Preset menu is exited by modifying the recalled Initial or Preset 3. Preset menu is exited by modifying the recalled Initial or Preset setting. setting. 4. Preset menu is re-entered by pushing front-panel PRESET menu 4. Preset menu is re-entered by pushing front-panel PRESET menu button. button. Push PRESET button to enter Preset menu. Push PRESET button to enter Preset menu. Touch or any of the 12 presets. Touch or any of the 12 presets.

3–38 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–38 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

As soon as any right-side front-panel control setting is changed, the As soon as any right-side front-panel control setting is changed, the instrument settings (as configured before that change) are saved, and instrument settings (as configured before that change) are saved, and the Preset menu is exited. the Preset menu is exited. To recover saved configuration, push the PRESET button again, and To recover saved configuration, push the PRESET button again, and then touch . then touch . If the Preset menu is exited by pushing the PRESET button, If the Preset menu is exited by pushing the PRESET button, instrument configuration will not be saved. instrument configuration will not be saved.

Store Store Presets can be used to store instrument front-panel configurations Presets can be used to store instrument front-panel configurations and user-modified measurement setups. and user-modified measurement setups. Store a new setup: Store a new setup: H H Configure items to be stored. Configure items to be stored. H H Push PRESET button to enter Preset menu. Push PRESET button to enter Preset menu. H H Touch . If password is enabled, enter the password Touch . If password is enabled, enter the password now. now. H H is added to the display. , is added to the display. , , , and are omitted. , , and are omitted. H H Touch desired preset name. Touch desired preset name. Example: (will now be outlined on touch screen). Example: (will now be outlined on touch screen).

CAUTION. When is touched, the CAUTION. When is touched, the previous configuration stored under that preset (Preset 9 in this previous configuration stored under that preset (Preset 9 in this example) will be written over. If this is not desired, push the PRESET example) will be written over. If this is not desired, push the PRESET menu button now to exit the menu without making changes. menu button now to exit the menu without making changes.

H H To store the new setup and return to the Preset menu, touch To store the new setup and return to the Preset menu, touch . . H H To exit the Preset menu without storing the new setup, push the To exit the Preset menu without storing the new setup, push the PRESET menu button. PRESET menu button.

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–39 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–39 Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

Name Name Renaming a PRESET: Renaming a PRESET: H H Push the PRESET button to enter Preset menu. Push the PRESET button to enter Preset menu. H H Touch . If password is enabled, enter the password now. Touch . If password is enabled, enter the password now. H H is added to the display. , is added to the display. , , , and are omitted. , , and are omitted. H H Touch the preset to be renamed. Touch the preset to be renamed. Example: . Example: . H H The Name menu screen, shown in Figure 3–19, is displayed. The Name menu screen, shown in Figure 3–19, is displayed. H H Push the buttons marked < > (under large knob) to select the digit Push the buttons marked < > (under large knob) to select the digit to be changed. The selected character is now outlined on the to be changed. The selected character is now outlined on the screen. screen. H H Rotate the large knob until the desired character is displayed. The Rotate the large knob until the desired character is displayed. The selections include: A through Z, 0 through 9, several punctuation selections include: A through Z, 0 through 9, several punctuation marks, international characters, and a space. marks, international characters, and a space. H H Use the < > buttons to move to the next character to be changed. Use the < > buttons to move to the next character to be changed. H H Select up to 8 digits in this manner. Select up to 8 digits in this manner. H H To return to the Preset menu without renaming the preset, touch To return to the Preset menu without renaming the preset, touch . To exit the menu without renaming the preset, push . To exit the menu without renaming the preset, push the front-panel PRESET button. To store the new preset name the front-panel PRESET button. To store the new preset name and return to the Preset menu, touch . and return to the Preset menu, touch . H H Up to 12 presets may be named. Up to 12 presets may be named. H H When all desired presets have been renamed, push the front-panel When all desired presets have been renamed, push the front-panel PRESET button to exit the menu. PRESET button to exit the menu.

3–40 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–40 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

Figure 3–19: Name Menu Screen Figure 3–19: Name Menu Screen

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–41 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–41 Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

Calibrate Menu Calibrate Menu General Calibration Menu Information General Calibration Menu Information The Calibrate menu is available for both vector and waveform, and The Calibrate menu is available for both vector and waveform, and uses both CRTs. uses both CRTs. Pushing the front-panel CALIBRATE button provides access to the Pushing the front-panel CALIBRATE button provides access to the menu. Several calibration features (such as Readout Intensity) can be menu. Several calibration features (such as Readout Intensity) can be selected using the touch screen menu. The settings can then be selected using the touch screen menu. The settings can then be modified (refer to the following Waveform and Vector calibration modified (refer to the following Waveform and Vector calibration procedures, or for more detailed procedures, refer to the 1780R-Se- procedures, or for more detailed procedures, refer to the 1780R-Se- ries Service Manual). New settings are stored when the Calibrate ries Service Manual). New settings are stored when the Calibrate menu is exited. menu is exited. The Calibrate menu can be exited by pushing the CALIBRATE The Calibrate menu can be exited by pushing the CALIBRATE button again, or by pushing another menu button. button again, or by pushing another menu button. To toggle the display between vectorscope and waveform calibra- To toggle the display between vectorscope and waveform calibra- tion, push the buttons under the CRTs. When waveform is selected, tion, push the buttons under the CRTs. When waveform is selected, the waveform calibrator is displayed on the right CRT, with the waveform calibrator is displayed on the right CRT, with waveform menu selections on the left CRT (vectorscope display waveform menu selections on the left CRT (vectorscope display blanked). When vectorscope is selected, the arrangement is reversed. blanked). When vectorscope is selected, the arrangement is reversed.

Waveform Calibration Information Waveform Calibration Information The internal calibrator signal is selected by touching the area of the screen until is outlined. It automatically SIGNAL> area of the screen until is outlined. It automatically reverts to when the Calibrate menu is exited and must be reverts to when the Calibrate menu is exited and must be reselected (if desired) when the menu is reentered. (CAL signal is reselected (if desired) when the menu is reentered. (CAL signal is not available in .) not available in .) HORIZ POSITION KNOB CAL (present in instruments with SN HORIZ POSITION KNOB CAL (present in instruments with SN below B020245), VOLT CURSORS ZERO SET, and CAL AMPL below B020245), VOLT CURSORS ZERO SET, and CAL AMPL ZERO SET provide menu displays on the waveform CRT. The ZERO SET provide menu displays on the waveform CRT. The current selection is indicated by a box on the vectorscope CRT, and current selection is indicated by a box on the vectorscope CRT, and the large knob function is circled on the waveform CRT. the large knob function is circled on the waveform CRT. HORIZ CAL, EXT HORIZ CAL, VERT CAL, READOUT HORIZ CAL, EXT HORIZ CAL, VERT CAL, READOUT INTENSITY, and TRACE ROTATION are circled when selected, to INTENSITY, and TRACE ROTATION are circled when selected, to indicate large knob assignment. indicate large knob assignment. An external 1.0 volt reference signal is required to calibrate the An external 1.0 volt reference signal is required to calibrate the EXTERNAL HORIZONTAL INPUT. EXTERNAL HORIZONTAL INPUT.

3–42 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–42 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

Waveform Calibration Procedure Waveform Calibration Procedure 1. Apply a video signal to a 1780R-Series input channel and select 1. Apply a video signal to a 1780R-Series input channel and select that channel for display. that channel for display. 2. Push the front-panel CONFIGURE button and touch until 1000 (1.0 volt) is outlined. CAL AMPL> until 1000 (1.0 volt) is outlined. 3. Push the front-panel CALIBRATE button. If Password operation 3. Push the front-panel CALIBRATE button. If Password operation is enabled, enter the password now. The Waveform Calibration is enabled, enter the password now. The Waveform Calibration menu will be displayed, as shown in Figure 3–20. menu will be displayed, as shown in Figure 3–20. 4. will be circled, and a test readout 4. will be circled, and a test readout will be displayed. Use the large knob to adjust the readout to the will be displayed. Use the large knob to adjust the readout to the desired intensity. (It is necessary to adjust readout intensity in this desired intensity. (It is necessary to adjust readout intensity in this manner; the front-panel INTENSITY control is used to adjust manner; the front-panel INTENSITY control is used to adjust signal intensity only.) signal intensity only.) Perform Step 5 for SN below B020245 only: Perform Step 5 for SN below B020245 only: 5. Touch to calibrate the Horizontal 5. Touch to calibrate the Horizontal Position knob. A menu will be displayed on the waveform CRT. Position knob. A menu will be displayed on the waveform CRT. Center the Horizontal Position control by turning the knob and Center the Horizontal Position control by turning the knob and releasing, allowing the spring (not necessarily the signal display) releasing, allowing the spring (not necessarily the signal display) to return to midpoint of its range. Then touch the area labeled to return to midpoint of its range. Then touch the area labeled

. This tells the microprocessor that the knob is now at the HERE>. This tells the microprocessor that the knob is now at the midpoint, or zero point, of its range. This zero point is referred to midpoint, or zero point, of its range. This zero point is referred to as the Dead Zone, and its tolerance can be varied by touching as the Dead Zone, and its tolerance can be varied by touching or . The value changes in single or . The value changes in single step increments from the smallest possible setting of 1 unit up to step increments from the smallest possible setting of 1 unit up to 16 units, and current value is shown on the readout. A beep 16 units, and current value is shown on the readout. A beep sounds when the Dead Zone has been increased or decreased as sounds when the Dead Zone has been increased or decreased as much as possible. As the Dead Zone is increased, the control much as possible. As the Dead Zone is increased, the control must be turned more before it will respond, but will also return to must be turned more before it will respond, but will also return to center more readily after it is turned. center more readily after it is turned. 6. Touch to obtain a test axis, then use the 6. Touch to obtain a test axis, then use the large knob to align the display to the graticule. large knob to align the display to the graticule.

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–43 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–43 Operating Instructions Operating Instructions Right CRT display Right CRT display Right CRT Left CRT display CRT Left Left CRT display CRT Left

Figure 3–20: Waveform Calibration Menu Display Figure 3–20: Waveform Calibration Menu Display

3–44 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–44 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

7. Touch to obtain a menu on the 7. Touch to obtain a menu on the waveform CRT for adjusting the calibrator zero level. Adjust the waveform CRT for adjusting the calibrator zero level. Adjust the large knob to overlay the two calibrator waveforms. Press the large knob to overlay the two calibrator waveforms. Press the front-panel REFERENCE SET button to record this zero setting. front-panel REFERENCE SET button to record this zero setting. 8. Touch to obtain a Voltage 8. Touch to obtain a Voltage Cursor menu on the waveform CRT. Use the large knob to move Cursor menu on the waveform CRT. Use the large knob to move cursors, touching the area to toggle cursors, touching the area to toggle between Cursors One and Two. When cursors are aligned, press between Cursors One and Two. When cursors are aligned, press REFERENCE SET to reset the displayed voltage difference to REFERENCE SET to reset the displayed voltage difference to zero. zero. 9. Touch until is outlined. (CAL 9. Touch until is outlined. (CAL signal is not available in .) signal is not available in .) a. Select . Use the large knob to adjust the a. Select . Use the large knob to adjust the vertical gain for a 1 V calibrator signal display on the vertical gain for a 1 V calibrator signal display on the waveform CRT. waveform CRT. b. Select TWO LINE sweep with VAR sweep off. b. Select TWO LINE sweep with VAR sweep off. c. Push the front-panel TIME button to turn on the timing c. Push the front-panel TIME button to turn on the timing cursors. Reduce the display intensity if necessary to view cursors. Reduce the display intensity if necessary to view the timing cursor dots. the timing cursor dots. d. Touch the area of the screen d. Touch the area of the screen until is outlined. Use the large knob to until is outlined. Use the large knob to move Timing Cursor 1 approximately 1 major division in move Timing Cursor 1 approximately 1 major division in from the left edge of the graticule. from the left edge of the graticule. e. Select and use the large knob to move it e. Select and use the large knob to move it 100 msec to the right of Timing Cursor 1, as indicated on 100 msec to the right of Timing Cursor 1, as indicated on the CRT readout. the CRT readout. f. Touch . The large knob will now adjust f. Touch . The large knob will now adjust sweep length (time) with respect to the graticule. Adjust sweep length (time) with respect to the graticule. Adjust for 10 divisions between cursor dots. for 10 divisions between cursor dots. g. Push the front-panel TIME button to turn off the timing g. Push the front-panel TIME button to turn off the timing cursors. Readjust the readout intensity if necessary. cursors. Readjust the readout intensity if necessary. h. Apply a 1.0 volt signal to the EXT HORIZ input. Ensure h. Apply a 1.0 volt signal to the EXT HORIZ input. Ensure that the signal is properly terminated in 75 W. that the signal is properly terminated in 75 W.

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–45 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–45 Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

i. Touch . The large knob will now i. Touch . The large knob will now adjust sweep length (time) with respect to the graticule. adjust sweep length (time) with respect to the graticule. Do not change the MAG setting (automatically set to Do not change the MAG setting (automatically set to 100 mV/div). Adjust the large knob for a horizontal 100 mV/div). Adjust the large knob for a horizontal display of 10 divisions. display of 10 divisions.

Vectorscope Calibration Information Vectorscope Calibration Information READOUT INTENSITY, TRACE ROTATION, and GAIN CAL READOUT INTENSITY, TRACE ROTATION, and GAIN CAL (GAIN 1 CAL / GAIN 2 CAL for NTSC software versions 1.11 & (GAIN 1 CAL / GAIN 2 CAL for NTSC software versions 1.11 & Up) will be circled when selected, to indicate large knob assignment. Up) will be circled when selected, to indicate large knob assignment. The oscillator signal is selected by touching the area of The oscillator signal is selected by touching the area of the screen until is outlined. It automatically reverts to the screen until is outlined. It automatically reverts to when the Calibration menu is exited and must be reselected (if when the Calibration menu is exited and must be reselected (if desired) when the menu is reentered. desired) when the menu is reentered.

Vectorscope Calibration Procedure Vectorscope Calibration Procedure (for Software Versions 1.11 & Up) (for Software Versions 1.11 & Up) 1. Push the front-panel CALIBRATE button to enter the Calibration 1. Push the front-panel CALIBRATE button to enter the Calibration menu. If Password operation is enabled, enter the password now. menu. If Password operation is enabled, enter the password now. Waveform calibration will be displayed. Waveform calibration will be displayed. 2. Push the button under the left CRT (LED will light) to select 2. Push the button under the left CRT (LED will light) to select Vectorscope calibration, shown in Figures 3–21, 3–22, and 3–23. Vectorscope calibration, shown in Figures 3–21, 3–22, and 3–23. 3. will be circled, and a test readout 3. will be circled, and a test readout will be displayed. Use the large knob to adjust Readout intensity. will be displayed. Use the large knob to adjust Readout intensity. (Only Readout intensity is adjusted through the menu; signal (Only Readout intensity is adjusted through the menu; signal intensity is adjusted with the front-panel INTENSITY control.) intensity is adjusted with the front-panel INTENSITY control.) 4. Touch to obtain a test axis, then use the 4. Touch to obtain a test axis, then use the large knob to adjust trace rotation. large knob to adjust trace rotation. 5. To adjust Vectorscope Gain, touch until is 5. To adjust Vectorscope Gain, touch until is outlined. While the cal oscillator is on, the V axis switcher is outlined. While the cal oscillator is on, the V axis switcher is enabled and 75% bars are selected (with 7.5% setup for NTSC). enabled and 75% bars are selected (with 7.5% setup for NTSC). a. For 1780R (NTSC), touch and use the a. For 1780R (NTSC), touch and use the large knob to make the circle match the compass rose. large knob to make the circle match the compass rose. Touch and again use the large knob to Touch and again use the large knob to make the circle match the compass rose. Touch . CAL>.

3–46 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–46 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Operating Instructions Operating Instructions Left CRT display CRT Left Right CRT display Left CRT display CRT Left Right CRT display

Figure 3–21: Vectorscope Calibration Menu Display for 1780R (NTSC), Figure 3–21: Vectorscope Calibration Menu Display for 1780R (NTSC), software versions 1.11 & Up, with CAL OSC Off software versions 1.11 & Up, with CAL OSC Off

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–47 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–47 Operating Instructions Operating Instructions Left CRT display CRT Left CRT display Right Left CRT display CRT Left CRT display Right

Figure 3–22: Vectorscope Calibration Menu Display for 1780R (NTSC), Figure 3–22: Vectorscope Calibration Menu Display for 1780R (NTSC), software versions 1.11 & Up, with CAL OSC On software versions 1.11 & Up, with CAL OSC On

3–48 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–48 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

For 1781R (PAL), touch and use the large For 1781R (PAL), touch and use the large knob to make the circle match the compass rose. knob to make the circle match the compass rose. b. Touch until is outlined. b. Touch until is outlined. 6. To check the Vectorscope Gain adjustment, push the front-panel 6. To check the Vectorscope Gain adjustment, push the front-panel CALIBRATE button to enter the Calibration menu, then push the CALIBRATE button to enter the Calibration menu, then push the button under the left CRT. button under the left CRT. a. Apply a color bar signal (with 7.5% Setup for NTSC) to a a. Apply a color bar signal (with 7.5% Setup for NTSC) to a 1780R-Series input channel and select that channel for 1780R-Series input channel and select that channel for display. A 100% or 75% color bar signal can be used, display. A 100% or 75% color bar signal can be used, depending on the vectorscope readout (derived from the depending on the vectorscope readout (derived from the Configure menu setting). Configure menu setting). b. Push the front-panel PHASE button and adjust the large b. Push the front-panel PHASE button and adjust the large knob to properly align the phase of the burst and vectors knob to properly align the phase of the burst and vectors on the graticule. Push the PHASE button again to exit this on the graticule. Push the PHASE button again to exit this mode. mode. c. For 1780R (NTSC): Touch . Check that c. For 1780R (NTSC): Touch . Check that the color bar vectors are in the graticule boxes. Set the the color bar vectors are in the graticule boxes. Set the generator to 0% Setup, touch and check that the color bar vectors are in the SETUP)> and check that the color bar vectors are in the graticule boxes. Return the generator to 7.5% Setup if graticule boxes. Return the generator to 7.5% Setup if desired. desired. For 1781R (PAL): Touch . Check that the For 1781R (PAL): Touch . Check that the color bar vectors are in the graticule boxes. color bar vectors are in the graticule boxes. d. Exit Calibrate menu. d. Exit Calibrate menu.

Vectorscope Calibration Procedure Vectorscope Calibration Procedure (for Software Versions 1.10 & Below) (for Software Versions 1.10 & Below) Perform Steps 1 through 6 for both 1780R and 1781R (NTSC and Perform Steps 1 through 6 for both 1780R and 1781R (NTSC and PAL). PAL). 1. Push the front-panel CALIBRATE button to enter the Calibration 1. Push the front-panel CALIBRATE button to enter the Calibration menu. If Password operation is enabled, enter the password now. menu. If Password operation is enabled, enter the password now. Waveform calibration will be displayed. Waveform calibration will be displayed. 2. Push the button under the left CRT (LED will light) to select 2. Push the button under the left CRT (LED will light) to select Vectorscope calibration, shown in Figure 3–23. Vectorscope calibration, shown in Figure 3–23.

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–49 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–49 Operating Instructions Operating Instructions Left CRT display CRT Left Right CRT display Left CRT display CRT Left CRT display Right

Figure 3–23: Vectorscope Calibration Menu Display for 1781R (PAL) all Figure 3–23: Vectorscope Calibration Menu Display for 1781R (PAL) all software versions, and for 1780R (NTSC) software versions 1.10 & software versions, and for 1780R (NTSC) software versions 1.10 & Below Below

3–50 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–50 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

3. will be circled, and a test readout 3. will be circled, and a test readout will be displayed. Use the large knob to adjust intensity. (The will be displayed. Use the large knob to adjust intensity. (The front-panel INTENSITY control adjusts signal intensity only. front-panel INTENSITY control adjusts signal intensity only. Readout intensity must be adjusted through the Calibration Readout intensity must be adjusted through the Calibration menu.) menu.) 4. Touch to obtain a test axis, then use the 4. Touch to obtain a test axis, then use the large knob to adjust trace rotation. large knob to adjust trace rotation. 5. Touch until is outlined. While the cal 5. Touch until is outlined. While the cal oscillator is on, the V axis switcher is enabled and 75% bars are oscillator is on, the V axis switcher is enabled and 75% bars are selected (with setup for NTSC). selected (with setup for NTSC). a. Touch . The large knob will now adjust a. Touch . The large knob will now adjust vectorscope gain. Use the large knob to make the circle vectorscope gain. Use the large knob to make the circle match the compass rose. match the compass rose. b. Exit Calibrate menu. b. Exit Calibrate menu. Perform Step 6 for 1780R (NTSC ) only. Perform Step 6 for 1780R (NTSC ) only. 6. Apply a 75% color bar signal with no setup to a 1780R input 6. Apply a 75% color bar signal with no setup to a 1780R input channel and select that channel for display. channel and select that channel for display. a. Push the front-panel CONFIGURE button to enter the a. Push the front-panel CONFIGURE button to enter the Configure menu. Touch the area of the screen Configure menu. Touch the area of the screen until <2> is outlined. until <2> is outlined. b. Touch until is outlined. b. Touch until is outlined. c. Touch until <75%> is outlined. c. Touch until <75%> is outlined. d. Push the front-panel PHASE button to assign the large d. Push the front-panel PHASE button to assign the large knob function to phase shift. Adjust the large knob to knob function to phase shift. Adjust the large knob to properly align the burst and vectors on the graticule. properly align the burst and vectors on the graticule. e. Push the front-panel CALIBRATE button to enter the e. Push the front-panel CALIBRATE button to enter the Calibration menu, then push the button under the left Calibration menu, then push the button under the left CRT. CRT. f. Touch . The large knob will now adjust f. Touch . The large knob will now adjust vectorscope gain. Use the large knob to set the color bar vectorscope gain. Use the large knob to set the color bar vectors to fall on the boxes. vectors to fall on the boxes. g. Exit Calibrate menu. g. Exit Calibrate menu.

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–51 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–51 Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

Configure Menu Configure Menu Changing Configurations Changing Configurations Push the CONFIGURE button to enter the Configure menu. Push the CONFIGURE button to enter the Configure menu. All front-panel controls remain operational during Configure menu All front-panel controls remain operational during Configure menu operation. operation. The Configure menu is a three-page menu, shown in Figures 3–24, The Configure menu is a three-page menu, shown in Figures 3–24, 3–25, and 3–26. Page one of the menu is displayed first; touch 3–25, and 3–26. Page one of the menu is displayed first; touch to toggle through pages. to toggle through pages. Instrument configuration choices are displayed on the touch-screen Instrument configuration choices are displayed on the touch-screen menu, with selected settings outlined. menu, with selected settings outlined. To change a setting, touch the desired feature on the screen. To change a setting, touch the desired feature on the screen. Example: Touch area to toggle between 75% Example: Touch area to toggle between 75% and 100% color bars. and 100% color bars. To store changes, exit the Configure menu by pushing the front-pan- To store changes, exit the Configure menu by pushing the front-pan- el CONFIGURE button or by pushing another menu button. el CONFIGURE button or by pushing another menu button.

3–52 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–52 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

Left CRT display Left CRT display

Figure 3–24: Configure Menu Screen, page 1 Figure 3–24: Configure Menu Screen, page 1

Table 3–6: Configure Menu Selections, page 1 Table 3–6: Configure Menu Selections, page 1

SYNC Direct or Auto Frequency Controlled wfm sync. SYNC Direct or Auto Frequency Controlled wfm sync. COUPLING AC / DC coupling or ground reference, sets all four inputs. (The probe COUPLING AC / DC coupling or ground reference, sets all four inputs. (The probe input is always AC coupled.) When GND is selected, the words input is always AC coupled.) When GND is selected, the words “INPUTS GROUNDED” are displayed on the CRT. “INPUTS GROUNDED” are displayed on the CRT. FIELD TRIG For two-field sweep only, selects whether field one or field two will be FIELD TRIG For two-field sweep only, selects whether field one or field two will be displayed on the left of the CRT. displayed on the left of the CRT. FIXED CAL Selects one of three fixed calibration amplitudes: FIXED CAL Selects one of three fixed calibration amplitudes: AMPL 700 mV, 714 mV, or 1000 mV. AMPL 700 mV, 714 mV, or 1000 mV. DC REST Wfm DC restorer clamps: slow, fast, or off. DC REST Wfm DC restorer clamps: slow, fast, or off. CLAMP Waveform is clamped to sync tip or back porch time. CLAMP Waveform is clamped to sync tip or back porch time. PAL PAL: +V and –V lines overlaid; appears as though only +V were PAL PAL: +V and –V lines overlaid; appears as though only +V were +V displayed (similar to NTSC display). +V displayed (similar to NTSC display). +V: The –V lines are demodulated 180° away from the +V lines. +V: The –V lines are demodulated 180° away from the +V lines. SYSTEM Instrument operates in PAL systems B / G or I. ICPM measurements are SYSTEM Instrument operates in PAL systems B / G or I. ICPM measurements are B/G I most affected (0 carrier reference level varies between systems). B/G I most affected (0 carrier reference level varies between systems).

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–53 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–53 Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

Left CRT display Left CRT display

Figure 3–25: Configure Menu Screen, page 2 Figure 3–25: Configure Menu Screen, page 2

Table 3–7: Configure Menu Selections, page 2 Table 3–7: Configure Menu Selections, page 2

BARS Vectorscope can be calibrated to 75% or 100% color bars. BARS Vectorscope can be calibrated to 75% or 100% color bars. _ _ _ _ PHASE 360 = Phase reads from 0 to 360 . PHASE 360 = Phase reads from 0 to 360 . _ _ _ _ DISPLAY 180 = Phase reads from +180 to –179.95 . DISPLAY 180 = Phase reads from +180 to –179.95 . VECT GRAT Select internal or external graticule illumination. VECT GRAT Select internal or external graticule illumination. WFM GRAT Select internal or external graticule illumination. WFM GRAT Select internal or external graticule illumination. ABS UNITS NTSC only. Choose millivolts or IRE units to express calibrator and ABS UNITS NTSC only. Choose millivolts or IRE units to express calibrator and voltage cursor amplitudes. voltage cursor amplitudes. PROBE Internal probe gain is X1 or X10. PROBE Internal probe gain is X1 or X10. X10 With 10X probe, 1 V signal at probe tip = 1 V on screen. Works like X10 With 10X probe, 1 V signal at probe tip = 1 V on screen. Works like probe input on 1480. probe input on 1480. X1 With X1 probe, 1 V signal at probe tip = 1 V on screen. X1 With X1 probe, 1 V signal at probe tip = 1 V on screen. With X10 probe, 5 V signal at probe tip = 0.5 V on screen. For use with With X10 probe, 5 V signal at probe tip = 0.5 V on screen. For use with TTL, etc. TTL, etc. SETUP NTSC only. Select when there is 7.5% setup on the incoming SETUP NTSC only. Select when there is 7.5% setup on the incoming signal. signal.

3–54 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–54 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

Left CRT display Left CRT display

Figure 3–26: Configure Menu Screen, page 3 Figure 3–26: Configure Menu Screen, page 3

Table 3–8: Configure Menu Selections, page 3 Table 3–8: Configure Menu Selections, page 3

CW SYNC When CW subcarrier is used for vectorscope reference, wfm sync CW SYNC When CW subcarrier is used for vectorscope reference, wfm sync source can be INT or EXT. source can be INT or EXT. SLOW SWP TRIG Select positive or negative transition of the input signal to trigger slow SLOW SWP TRIG Select positive or negative transition of the input signal to trigger slow sweep. sweep. BAUD RATE Select the baud rate for the serial interface. BAUD RATE Select the baud rate for the serial interface. VECT READOUT enables on-screen readouts of data during vectorscope VECT READOUT enables on-screen readouts of data during vectorscope operation. disables the readout. Full-screen menus are not operation. disables the readout. Full-screen menus are not affected. affected. WFM READOUT enables on-screen readouts of data during waveform monitor WFM READOUT enables on-screen readouts of data during waveform monitor operation. disables the readout. Full-screen menus are not operation. disables the readout. Full-screen menus are not affected. affected. BEEP Beep is either on or off. When on, audio indicates when touch screen BEEP Beep is either on or off. When on, audio indicates when touch screen selections have been made. selections have been made. KNOB ASSIGN When , with vectorscope CRT selected, will revert to waveform KNOB ASSIGN When , with vectorscope CRT selected, will revert to waveform TIMEOUT CRT selection after 30 seconds of no knob activity. TIMEOUT CRT selection after 30 seconds of no knob activity. VERSION The version of software currently installed. VERSION The version of software currently installed.

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–55 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–55 Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

Measure Menu Measure Menu

Left CRT display Left CRT display

Figure 3–27: Measure Menu Screen Figure 3–27: Measure Menu Screen

Using the Measure Menu Using the Measure Menu Push the front-panel MEASURE button to enter the Measurement Push the front-panel MEASURE button to enter the Measurement menu, illustrated in Figure 3–27. menu, illustrated in Figure 3–27. To select a measurement type, touch the desired measurement on the To select a measurement type, touch the desired measurement on the screen. (Selections are described in Table 3–9.) screen. (Selections are described in Table 3–9.) Example: touch to access simultaneous Example: touch to access simultaneous Differential Phase and Differential Gain Differential Phase and Differential Gain measurements. measurements. The menu display is replaced by vector and waveform displays, with The menu display is replaced by vector and waveform displays, with the selected measurement indicated in the upper left corner of the the selected measurement indicated in the upper left corner of the vectorscope CRT. vectorscope CRT.

3–56 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–56 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

Front-panel and menu settings are automatically adjusted to Front-panel and menu settings are automatically adjusted to accommodate the selected measurement. accommodate the selected measurement. To exit a measurement mode, push the front-panel MEASURE To exit a measurement mode, push the front-panel MEASURE button. In the case of DIFF PHASE and DIFF GAIN measurements, button. In the case of DIFF PHASE and DIFF GAIN measurements, touch and areas of touch and areas of the screen to alternate between those two measurements. the screen to alternate between those two measurements.

Table 3–9: Measure Menu Description Table 3–9: Measure Menu Description

DIFF PHASE Differential Phase DIFF PHASE Differential Phase DIFF GAIN Differential Gain DIFF GAIN Differential Gain DP & DG Simultaneous Differential Phase / Differential Gain DP & DG Simultaneous Differential Phase / Differential Gain NOISE Signal-to-Noise ratio NOISE Signal-to-Noise ratio ICPM Incidental Carrier Phase Modulation ICPM Incidental Carrier Phase Modulation

K FACTOR K2T measurement K FACTOR K2T measurement CHROMA/LUMA Chrominance-to-Luminance Gain & Delay CHROMA/LUMA Chrominance-to-Luminance Gain & Delay SHORT TIME DISTORTION Short Time Distortion SHORT TIME DISTORTION Short Time Distortion R–Y SWEEP Demodulator output R–Y SWEEP Demodulator output BOWTIE Instrument set to B1–B2 and B1–B3 in Parade mode BOWTIE Instrument set to B1–B2 and B1–B3 in Parade mode FSC TIME MARKS NTSC only. Bright-up dots on waveform at subcarrier FSC TIME MARKS NTSC only. Bright-up dots on waveform at subcarrier frequency frequency

Beep Beep Although most front-panel buttons remain operational in Measure- Although most front-panel buttons remain operational in Measure- ment modes, some are locked. If an attempt is made to change a ment modes, some are locked. If an attempt is made to change a locked setting, a beep sounds. locked setting, a beep sounds.

Store and Recall Modified Setups Store and Recall Modified Setups Enter the Measure menu, select a measurement, and modify the Enter the Measure menu, select a measurement, and modify the front-panel setup as desired. front-panel setup as desired. Push the PRESET button. Following Preset menu instructions, store Push the PRESET button. Following Preset menu instructions, store the modified measurement information at any preset location. the modified measurement information at any preset location.

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–57 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–57 Operating Instructions Operating Instructions

After both Preset and Measure menus have been exited, push the After both Preset and Measure menus have been exited, push the PRESET button and touch the appropriate preset. The stored PRESET button and touch the appropriate preset. The stored measurement mode, including the user modifications, will be measurement mode, including the user modifications, will be recalled. Both Preset and Measure LEDs will be on. recalled. Both Preset and Measure LEDs will be on.

Making Measurements Making Measurements Detailed instructions for each measurement are given in Section 4. Detailed instructions for each measurement are given in Section 4.

3–58 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3–58 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Measurements Measurements

Measurements Measurements

Measurement Information Measurement Information

Figure 4–1: Measure Menu Access Figure 4–1: Measure Menu Access

NOTE. The measurements described in this section are accessed NOTE. The measurements described in this section are accessed through the Measurement menu, shown in Figure 4–1. through the Measurement menu, shown in Figure 4–1.

Push the front-panel MEASURE button to enable the Measurement Push the front-panel MEASURE button to enable the Measurement menu. menu. To access a desired measurement mode, touch the corresponding To access a desired measurement mode, touch the corresponding area on the Measurement menu screen. area on the Measurement menu screen. To exit a measurement mode, push the front-panel MEASURE To exit a measurement mode, push the front-panel MEASURE button again. In the case of DIFF GAIN and DIFF PHASE button again. In the case of DIFF GAIN and DIFF PHASE

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–1 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–1 Measurements Measurements

measurements, touch the and and areas of the screen to alternate between those two DIFF GAIN> areas of the screen to alternate between those two measurement modes. measurement modes. To perform additional measurements, push the MEASURE button To perform additional measurements, push the MEASURE button and touch the next desired measurement. and touch the next desired measurement.

Differential Phase Measurement Differential Phase Measurement Enter DIFF PHASE Mode Enter DIFF PHASE Mode Push the MEASURE button to enable the Measurement menu, Push the MEASURE button to enable the Measurement menu, shown in Figure 4–1. shown in Figure 4–1. Touch on the screen. Touch on the screen. The DIFF PHASE menu is displayed on the left CRT, with The DIFF PHASE menu is displayed on the left CRT, with demodulator output displayed on the right CRT, as shown in demodulator output displayed on the right CRT, as shown in Figure 4–2. Figure 4–2. The instrument is now configured as specified in Table 4–1. The instrument is now configured as specified in Table 4–1. Large knob function is phase shift, and PHASE SHIFT LED lights. Large knob function is phase shift, and PHASE SHIFT LED lights.

Exit DIFF PHASE Mode Exit DIFF PHASE Mode To exit DIFF PHASE mode, push the MEASURE button again. All To exit DIFF PHASE mode, push the MEASURE button again. All instrument settings return to previous state. instrument settings return to previous state. To move from DIFF PHASE mode to DIFF GAIN, touch the area of the screen. TO DIFF GAIN> area of the screen. Horizontal positions, Vertical positions, and gain settings defined Horizontal positions, Vertical positions, and gain settings defined while in DIFF PHASE mode will be stored when exiting, and while in DIFF PHASE mode will be stored when exiting, and reinstated when this mode is selected again. reinstated when this mode is selected again.

DIFF PHASE Menu Selections DIFF PHASE Menu Selections

NOTE. While operating in Line Select mode, noise reduction operates NOTE. While operating in Line Select mode, noise reduction operates only with full field test signals. only with full field test signals.

4–2 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–2 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Measurements Measurements

Right CRT display Right CRT display

Left CRT display Left CRT display

Figure 4–2: Differential Phase Measurement Figure 4–2: Differential Phase Measurement

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–3 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–3 Measurements Measurements

Table 4–1: DIFF PHASE Front-Panel Configuration Table 4–1: DIFF PHASE Front-Panel Configuration

VECTORSCOPE Vector display enabled, other choices locked out. VECTORSCOPE Vector display enabled, other choices locked out. WAVEFORM R–Y sweep displayed, all front-panel choices locked out. WAVEFORM R–Y sweep displayed, all front-panel choices locked out. (There is no LED to indicate R–Y sweep.) (There is no LED to indicate R–Y sweep.) INPUT Status does not change. All differential modes locked out; if INPUT Status does not change. All differential modes locked out; if a differential mode was enabled, input is forced to CH A. a differential mode was enabled, input is forced to CH A. REFERENCE Status does not change. REFERENCE Status does not change. FILTER Locked out. FILTER Locked out. WFM SWEEPS Set to One Line when DIFF PHASE is selected. If WFM SWEEPS Set to One Line when DIFF PHASE is selected. If mode is selected, any of the other sweeps can mode is selected, any of the other sweeps can be selected, using front-panel controls. If is be selected, using front-panel controls. If is selected, the instrument is set to One Line. The Field, Two selected, the instrument is set to One Line. The Field, Two Line and Three Line Sweeps are locked out. Line and Three Line Sweeps are locked out. GAINS Vectorscope and Waveform gains can be adjusted while in GAINS Vectorscope and Waveform gains can be adjusted while in DIFF PHASE mode; the new settings will be saved when DIFF PHASE mode; the new settings will be saved when the Measurement menu is exited, and reinstated when DIFF the Measurement menu is exited, and reinstated when DIFF PHASE mode is again enabled. PHASE mode is again enabled. WAVEFORM POSITION The Horizontal and Vertical Position controls can be WAVEFORM POSITION The Horizontal and Vertical Position controls can be adjusted while in DIFF PHASE mode; the new settings will adjusted while in DIFF PHASE mode; the new settings will be saved when the Measurement menu is exited, and be saved when the Measurement menu is exited, and reinstated when DIFF PHASE mode is again enabled. The reinstated when DIFF PHASE mode is again enabled. The Vertical Position Control range is limited in order to keep the Vertical Position Control range is limited in order to keep the signal on screen. signal on screen. VOLT / TIME CURSOR Not available in DIFF PHASE mode. VOLT / TIME CURSOR Not available in DIFF PHASE mode.

Noise Reduction. Touch to toggle between Noise Reduction. Touch to toggle between and . When noise reduction is off, the demodulator and . When noise reduction is off, the demodulator output (500 kHz BW) is directly displayed. When noise reduction is output (500 kHz BW) is directly displayed. When noise reduction is on, noise reduction of about 10–12 dB is accomplished without any on, noise reduction of about 10–12 dB is accomplished without any reduction in bandwidth. reduction in bandwidth. Noise reduction can be used in both and Noise reduction can be used in both and modes. modes.

4–4 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–4 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Measurements Measurements

NOTE. Freeze only available with Noise Reduction ON. NOTE. Freeze only available with Noise Reduction ON.

Freeze. To capture the display (right CRT only), touch so that is outlined, then touch . REDUCTION> so that is outlined, then touch . will be outlined. will be outlined. The captured display remains on the screen even if the input signal is The captured display remains on the screen even if the input signal is removed. The display is lost when the DIFF PHASE menu is exited removed. The display is lost when the DIFF PHASE menu is exited by any method, including touching , pushing by any method, including touching , pushing any of the four front-panel menu buttons, pushing the front-panel any of the four front-panel menu buttons, pushing the front-panel LINE SELECT button to enter Line Select mode, changing the LINE SELECT button to enter Line Select mode, changing the selected line if already in Line Select mode, or turning instrument selected line if already in Line Select mode, or turning instrument power off. power off. To exit Freeze mode, touch again. To exit Freeze mode, touch again.

DIFF PHASE Measurement Information DIFF PHASE Measurement Information The 1780R-Series provides two methods of making differential The 1780R-Series provides two methods of making differential phase measurements: single- and double-trace. phase measurements: single- and double-trace. The single-trace method of differential phase measurement The single-trace method of differential phase measurement resembles the single-trace differential phase mode on the 520A-Se- resembles the single-trace differential phase mode on the 520A-Se- ries. This method requires the operator to normalize the gains, but ries. This method requires the operator to normalize the gains, but those settings will be stored and recalled at next entry to DIFF those settings will be stored and recalled at next entry to DIFF PHASE mode. The amount of distortion is read from the graticule PHASE mode. The amount of distortion is read from the graticule scale. scale. The double-trace method of differential phase measurement The double-trace method of differential phase measurement resembles the double-trace differential phase in the R520A-Series. resembles the double-trace differential phase in the R520A-Series. This method requires the operator to null the space between the ends This method requires the operator to null the space between the ends and individual steps of the two traces. This provides greater accuracy and individual steps of the two traces. This provides greater accuracy than the single-trace method, and gives an on-screen readout of the than the single-trace method, and gives an on-screen readout of the distortion measurement. distortion measurement.

Single-Trace DIFF PHASE Measurement Procedure Single-Trace DIFF PHASE Measurement Procedure 1. Apply a staircase signal or a ramp signal with subcarrier to the 1. Apply a staircase signal or a ramp signal with subcarrier to the 1780R-Series. 1780R-Series. 2. Touch . 2. Touch .

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–5 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–5 Measurements Measurements

3. Use the vectorscope variable gain control to set the amplitude of 3. Use the vectorscope variable gain control to set the amplitude of the chroma to be measured to the edge of the compass rose. the chroma to be measured to the edge of the compass rose. 4. Use the large knob to set the phase of the chroma to be measured 4. Use the large knob to set the phase of the chroma to be measured to the nine o’clock position. See Figure 4–3. to the nine o’clock position. See Figure 4–3. 5. Use the Waveform Vertical Position control to place the 5. Use the Waveform Vertical Position control to place the beginning of the trace on a reference graticule mark. beginning of the trace on a reference graticule mark. 6. Differential phase is that amount of signal that lies above or 6. Differential phase is that amount of signal that lies above or below the reference graticule mark. Read the amount directly off below the reference graticule mark. Read the amount directly off _ _ the graticule scale (waveform CRT); 1 major division = 1 the graticule scale (waveform CRT); 1 major division = 1 (10 IRE NTSC or 100 mV PAL). (10 IRE NTSC or 100 mV PAL).

Double-Trace DIFF PHASE Measurement Procedure Double-Trace DIFF PHASE Measurement Procedure 1. Apply a staircase signal or a ramp signal with subcarrier to the 1. Apply a staircase signal or a ramp signal with subcarrier to the 1780R-Series. 1780R-Series. 2. Touch . 2. Touch . 3. Use the vectorscope variable gain control to set the amplitude of 3. Use the vectorscope variable gain control to set the amplitude of the chroma to be measured as desired, usually to the compass the chroma to be measured as desired, usually to the compass rose. In Double DIFF PHASE mode only, this setting may be rose. In Double DIFF PHASE mode only, this setting may be altered to improve vertical resolution without affecting the altered to improve vertical resolution without affecting the accuracy of the readout. accuracy of the readout. 4. Use the large knob to bring the left ends of the two traces 4. Use the large knob to bring the left ends of the two traces (waveform CRT) together. (waveform CRT) together. 5. Push the REFERENCE SET front-panel button. Phase readout 5. Push the REFERENCE SET front-panel button. Phase readout _ _ should be 0.00 . should be 0.00 . 6. Locate the point of largest deviation between the two traces, and 6. Locate the point of largest deviation between the two traces, and use the large knob to bring the two traces together at that point. use the large knob to bring the two traces together at that point. 7. Phase readout now gives the total amount of differential phase. 7. Phase readout now gives the total amount of differential phase. To measure the differential phase of each step in the signal, To measure the differential phase of each step in the signal, repeat the process, bringing each individual step together. repeat the process, bringing each individual step together.

Using Line Select in DIFF PHASE Using Line Select in DIFF PHASE 1. Push the front-panel LINE SELECT button to enable Line Select 1. Push the front-panel LINE SELECT button to enable Line Select mode. Both the waveform monitor and vectorscope will be in mode. Both the waveform monitor and vectorscope will be in Line Select, and display the same line. Line Select, and display the same line.

4–6 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–6 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Measurements Measurements

2. Line Select readout is provided on the waveform CRT. Make sure 2. Line Select readout is provided on the waveform CRT. Make sure the Line number is circled. If it is not, touch the screen in that the Line number is circled. If it is not, touch the screen in that area. area. 3. Touch

to outline for Line Select menu display 3. Touch to outline for Line Select menu display on the vectorscope CRT. Make Line select menu choices as on the vectorscope CRT. Make Line select menu choices as desired. desired. 4. Use large knob or < > buttons to change selected line. 4. Use large knob or < > buttons to change selected line.

Differential Gain Measurement Differential Gain Measurement Enter DIFF GAIN Mode Enter DIFF GAIN Mode Push the MEASURE button to enable the Measurement menu, as Push the MEASURE button to enable the Measurement menu, as shown in Figure 4–1. shown in Figure 4–1. Touch on the screen. Touch on the screen. The DIFF GAIN menu is displayed on the left CRT, and the The DIFF GAIN menu is displayed on the left CRT, and the demodulator sweep is displayed on the right CRT, as shown in demodulator sweep is displayed on the right CRT, as shown in Figure 4–3. The instrument is now configured as specified in Figure 4–3. The instrument is now configured as specified in Table 4–2. Table 4–2.

Exit DIFF GAIN Mode Exit DIFF GAIN Mode To exit DIFF GAIN mode, push the MEASURE button again. All To exit DIFF GAIN mode, push the MEASURE button again. All instrument settings return to previous state. instrument settings return to previous state. To move from DIFF GAIN mode to DIFF PHASE, touch the area of the screen. TO DIFF PHASE> area of the screen. Horizontal positions, vertical positions, and gain settings defined Horizontal positions, vertical positions, and gain settings defined while in DIFF GAIN mode will be stored when exiting, and while in DIFF GAIN mode will be stored when exiting, and reinstated when this mode is selected again. reinstated when this mode is selected again.

DIFF GAIN Menu Selections DIFF GAIN Menu Selections Noise Reduction. Touch to toggle between Noise Reduction. Touch to toggle between and . When noise reduction is off, the demodulator and . When noise reduction is off, the demodulator output (500 kHz BW) is directly displayed. When noise reduction is output (500 kHz BW) is directly displayed. When noise reduction is on, noise reduction of about 10–12 dB is accomplished without any on, noise reduction of about 10–12 dB is accomplished without any reduction in bandwidth. reduction in bandwidth.

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–7 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–7 Measurements Measurements

Right CRT display Right CRT display

Left CRT display Left CRT display

Figure 4–3: Differential Gain Measurement Figure 4–3: Differential Gain Measurement

4–8 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–8 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Measurements Measurements

Table 4–2: DIFF GAIN Front-Panel Configuration Table 4–2: DIFF GAIN Front-Panel Configuration

VECTORSCOPE Vector display enabled, other choices locked out. VECTORSCOPE Vector display enabled, other choices locked out. WAVEFORM Demodulated sweep displayed, all front-panel choices WAVEFORM Demodulated sweep displayed, all front-panel choices locked out. (There is no LED to indicate demodulated locked out. (There is no LED to indicate demodulated sweep.) sweep.) INPUT Status does not change. All differential modes locked out; if INPUT Status does not change. All differential modes locked out; if a differential mode was enabled, input is forced to CH A. a differential mode was enabled, input is forced to CH A. REFERENCE Status does not change. REFERENCE Status does not change. FILTER Locked out. FILTER Locked out. WFM SWEEPS Set to One Line when DIFF GAIN is selected. If WFM SWEEPS Set to One Line when DIFF GAIN is selected. If mode is selected, any of the other sweeps can be selected, mode is selected, any of the other sweeps can be selected, using front-panel controls. If is selected, the using front-panel controls. If is selected, the instrument is set to One Line. The Field, Two Line, and instrument is set to One Line. The Field, Two Line, and Three Line Sweeps are locked out. Three Line Sweeps are locked out. GAINS Vectorscope and Waveform gains can be adjusted while in GAINS Vectorscope and Waveform gains can be adjusted while in DIFF GAIN mode; the new settings will be saved when the DIFF GAIN mode; the new settings will be saved when the Measurement menu is exited, and reinstated when DIFF Measurement menu is exited, and reinstated when DIFF GAIN mode is again enabled. GAIN mode is again enabled. WAVEFORM POSITION The Horizontal and Vertical Position controls can be WAVEFORM POSITION The Horizontal and Vertical Position controls can be adjusted while in DIFF GAIN mode; the new settings will be adjusted while in DIFF GAIN mode; the new settings will be saved when the Measurement menu is exited, and saved when the Measurement menu is exited, and reinstated when DIFF GAIN mode is again enabled. The reinstated when DIFF GAIN mode is again enabled. The Vertical Position Control range is limited in order to keep the Vertical Position Control range is limited in order to keep the signal on screen. signal on screen. VOLTAGE & TIMING Not available in DIFF GAIN mode. VOLTAGE & TIMING Not available in DIFF GAIN mode. CURSORS CURSORS

Noise reduction can be used in both and Noise reduction can be used in both and modes. modes.

NOTE. Freeze available only with Noise Reduction ON. NOTE. Freeze available only with Noise Reduction ON.

Freeze. To capture the display (right CRT only), touch , then touch . REDUCTION ON>, then touch .

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–9 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–9 Measurements Measurements

The captured display remains on the screen even if the input signal is The captured display remains on the screen even if the input signal is removed. The display is lost when the DIFF GAIN menu is exited by removed. The display is lost when the DIFF GAIN menu is exited by any method, including touching , pushing any method, including touching , pushing any of the four front-panel menu buttons, pushing the front-panel any of the four front-panel menu buttons, pushing the front-panel LINE SELECT button to enter Line Select mode, changing the LINE SELECT button to enter Line Select mode, changing the selected line if already in Line Select mode, or turning instrument selected line if already in Line Select mode, or turning instrument power off. power off. To exit Freeze mode, touch again. To exit Freeze mode, touch again.

DIFF GAIN Measurement Information DIFF GAIN Measurement Information The 1780R-Series provides two methods of making differential gain The 1780R-Series provides two methods of making differential gain measurements: single- and double-trace. measurements: single- and double-trace. The single-trace method of differential gain measurement resembles The single-trace method of differential gain measurement resembles differential gain on the 520A-Series. This method requires the differential gain on the 520A-Series. This method requires the operator to normalize the gains, but those settings will be stored and operator to normalize the gains, but those settings will be stored and recalled at next entry to DIFF GAIN mode. The amount of distortion recalled at next entry to DIFF GAIN mode. The amount of distortion is read from the graticule scale. is read from the graticule scale. The double-trace method of differential gain measurement resembles The double-trace method of differential gain measurement resembles double-trace differential phase in both 1780R-Series and R520A-Se- double-trace differential phase in both 1780R-Series and R520A-Se- ries. This method requires the operator to null the space between the ries. This method requires the operator to null the space between the ends and individual steps of the two traces. This provides greater ends and individual steps of the two traces. This provides greater accuracy than the single-trace method, and gives an on-screen accuracy than the single-trace method, and gives an on-screen readout of the distortion measurement. readout of the distortion measurement.

Single-Trace DIFF GAIN Measurement Procedure Single-Trace DIFF GAIN Measurement Procedure 1. Touch . 1. Touch . 2. Apply a staircase signal or a ramp signal with subcarrier to the 2. Apply a staircase signal or a ramp signal with subcarrier to the 1780R-Series. 1780R-Series. 3. Use the vectorscope variable gain control to set the amplitude of 3. Use the vectorscope variable gain control to set the amplitude of the chroma to be measured to the edge of the compass rose. the chroma to be measured to the edge of the compass rose. 4. Use the large knob to set the phase of the chroma to be measured 4. Use the large knob to set the phase of the chroma to be measured to the nine o’clock position. See Figure 4–3. to the nine o’clock position. See Figure 4–3. 5. Use the Waveform Vertical Position control to place the 5. Use the Waveform Vertical Position control to place the beginning of the trace (waveform CRT) on a graticule reference beginning of the trace (waveform CRT) on a graticule reference mark. mark.

4–10 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–10 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Measurements Measurements

6. Differential gain is the amount of signal that is above or below 6. Differential gain is the amount of signal that is above or below the graticule reference mark. Read the amount directly off the the graticule reference mark. Read the amount directly off the graticule scale (waveform CRT); 1 major division = 1% (10 IRE graticule scale (waveform CRT); 1 major division = 1% (10 IRE NTSC or 100 mV PAL). NTSC or 100 mV PAL).

Double-Trace DIFF GAIN Measurement Procedure Double-Trace DIFF GAIN Measurement Procedure 1. Apply a staircase signal or a ramp signal with subcarrier to the 1. Apply a staircase signal or a ramp signal with subcarrier to the 1780R-Series. 1780R-Series. 2. Touch . 2. Touch . 3. Use the vectorscope variable gain control to set the amplitude of 3. Use the vectorscope variable gain control to set the amplitude of the chroma to be measured to the compass rose. the chroma to be measured to the compass rose. 4. Locate the point of largest deviation between the two traces 4. Locate the point of largest deviation between the two traces (waveform CRT), and use the large knob to bring the traces (waveform CRT), and use the large knob to bring the traces together at this point. together at this point. 5. Push the REFERENCE SET front-panel button. Diff gain readout 5. Push the REFERENCE SET front-panel button. Diff gain readout should be 0.0%. should be 0.0%. 6. Locate the point of largest deviation between the two traces, and 6. Locate the point of largest deviation between the two traces, and use the large knob to bring the traces together at this point. use the large knob to bring the traces together at this point. 7. Diff gain readout (waveform CRT) now gives the total amount of 7. Diff gain readout (waveform CRT) now gives the total amount of differential gain. differential gain. 8. To measure the differential phase of each step in the signal, 8. To measure the differential phase of each step in the signal, repeat the process, bringing each individual step together. repeat the process, bringing each individual step together.

Using Line Select in DIFF GAIN Using Line Select in DIFF GAIN 1. Push the front-panel LINE SELECT button to enable Line Select 1. Push the front-panel LINE SELECT button to enable Line Select mode. Both the waveform monitor and vectorscope will be in mode. Both the waveform monitor and vectorscope will be in Line Select, and display the same line. Line Select, and display the same line. 2. Line Select readout is provided on the waveform CRT. 2. Line Select readout is provided on the waveform CRT. 3. Touch

to outline for Line Select menu display 3. Touch to outline for Line Select menu display on the vectorscope CRT. on the vectorscope CRT.

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–11 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–11 Measurements Measurements

Simultaneous Diff Phase & Diff Gain Measurements Simultaneous Diff Phase & Diff Gain Measurements Enter DP & DG Mode Enter DP & DG Mode Push the MEASURE button to enable the Measurement menu, Push the MEASURE button to enable the Measurement menu, shown in Figure 4–1. shown in Figure 4–1. Touch on the screen to enable simultaneous differential Touch on the screen to enable simultaneous differential phase and differential gain measurements. phase and differential gain measurements. The DP & DG menu is displayed on the left CRT, and the demodu- The DP & DG menu is displayed on the left CRT, and the demodu- lated sweep is displayed on the right CRT. See Figure 4–4. lated sweep is displayed on the right CRT. See Figure 4–4. The instrument is now configured as specified in Table 4–3. The instrument is now configured as specified in Table 4–3.

Exit DP & DG Mode Exit DP & DG Mode To exit DP & DG mode, push the MEASURE button again. All To exit DP & DG mode, push the MEASURE button again. All instrument settings return to previous state. instrument settings return to previous state. Horizontal positions, vertical positions, and gain settings defined Horizontal positions, vertical positions, and gain settings defined while in DP & DG mode will be stored when exiting, and reinstated while in DP & DG mode will be stored when exiting, and reinstated when this mode is selected again. when this mode is selected again.

DP & DG Menu Selections DP & DG Menu Selections Noise Reduction. Touch to toggle between Noise Reduction. Touch to toggle between and . When noise reduction is off, the demodulator and . When noise reduction is off, the demodulator output (500 kHz BW) is directly displayed. When noise reduction is output (500 kHz BW) is directly displayed. When noise reduction is on, noise reduction of about 10–12 dB is accomplished without any on, noise reduction of about 10–12 dB is accomplished without any reduction in bandwidth. reduction in bandwidth. Freeze. To capture the display (right CRT only), touch so that is outlined, then touch . REDUCTION> so that is outlined, then touch . will be outlined. will be outlined. The captured display remains on the screen even if the input signal is The captured display remains on the screen even if the input signal is removed. The display is lost when the DP & DG menu is exited by removed. The display is lost when the DP & DG menu is exited by any method, including pushing any of the four front-panel menu any method, including pushing any of the four front-panel menu buttons, pushing the front-panel LINE SELECT button to enter Line buttons, pushing the front-panel LINE SELECT button to enter Line Select mode, changing the selected line if already in Line Select Select mode, changing the selected line if already in Line Select mode, or turning instrument power off. mode, or turning instrument power off. To exit Freeze mode, touch again. To exit Freeze mode, touch again.

4–12 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–12 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Measurements Measurements

Right CRT display Right CRT display

Left CRT display Left CRT display

Figure 4–4: DP & DG Measurement Figure 4–4: DP & DG Measurement

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–13 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–13 Measurements Measurements

Table 4–3: DP & DG Front-Panel Configuration Table 4–3: DP & DG Front-Panel Configuration

VECTORSCOPE Vector display enabled, other choices locked out. VECTORSCOPE Vector display enabled, other choices locked out. WAVEFORM Demodulated sweep displayed, all front-panel choices WAVEFORM Demodulated sweep displayed, all front-panel choices locked out. (There is no LED to indicate demodulated locked out. (There is no LED to indicate demodulated sweep.) sweep.) INPUT Status does not change. All differential modes locked out; if INPUT Status does not change. All differential modes locked out; if a differential mode was enabled, input is forced to CH A. a differential mode was enabled, input is forced to CH A. REFERENCE Status does not change. REFERENCE Status does not change. FILTER Locked out. FILTER Locked out. WFM SWEEPS Set to Two Line when DP & DG is selected. Field, One Line, WFM SWEEPS Set to Two Line when DP & DG is selected. Field, One Line, and Two Line Sweeps are locked out. and Two Line Sweeps are locked out. GAINS Vectorscope and Waveform gains can be adjusted while in GAINS Vectorscope and Waveform gains can be adjusted while in DP & DG mode; the new settings will be stored and recalled DP & DG mode; the new settings will be stored and recalled at next entry to DP & DG mode. at next entry to DP & DG mode. WAVEFORM POSITION The Horizontal and Vertical Position controls can be WAVEFORM POSITION The Horizontal and Vertical Position controls can be adjusted while in DP & DG mode; the new settings will be adjusted while in DP & DG mode; the new settings will be stored and recalled at next entry to DP & DG mode. The stored and recalled at next entry to DP & DG mode. The Vertical Position control range is limited to keep the signal Vertical Position control range is limited to keep the signal on screen. The Vertical Position control range is limited in on screen. The Vertical Position control range is limited in order to keep the signal on screen. order to keep the signal on screen. VOLT / TIME CURSOR Not available in DP & DG mode. VOLT / TIME CURSOR Not available in DP & DG mode.

DP & DG Measurement Information DP & DG Measurement Information Single-Trace DP & DG. While the 1780R-Series provides two methods Single-Trace DP & DG. While the 1780R-Series provides two methods of making differential phase and differential gain measurements, of making differential phase and differential gain measurements, only the single-trace method is available for simultaneous differen- only the single-trace method is available for simultaneous differen- tial phase and gain measurements. A two-line display is used to tial phase and gain measurements. A two-line display is used to display the two measurements simultaneously on one CRT display the two measurements simultaneously on one CRT (waveform monitor), with single-trace diff phase on the left portion (waveform monitor), with single-trace diff phase on the left portion of the CRT and single-trace diff gain on the right portion of the CRT. of the CRT and single-trace diff gain on the right portion of the CRT. The single-trace method of differential phase and gain measurement The single-trace method of differential phase and gain measurement resembles differential phase on the TEKTRONIX R520A-Series. resembles differential phase on the TEKTRONIX R520A-Series. This method requires the operator to normalize the gains, but those This method requires the operator to normalize the gains, but those

4–14 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–14 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Measurements Measurements

settings will be stored and recalled at next entry to DP & DG mode. settings will be stored and recalled at next entry to DP & DG mode. The amount of distortion is read from the graticule scale. The amount of distortion is read from the graticule scale.

DIFF PHASE & DIFF GAIN Measurement Procedure DIFF PHASE & DIFF GAIN Measurement Procedure 1. Apply a staircase signal or a ramp signal with subcarrier to the 1. Apply a staircase signal or a ramp signal with subcarrier to the 1780R-Series. 1780R-Series. 2. Touch . 2. Touch . 3. Use the vectorscope variable gain control to set the amplitude of 3. Use the vectorscope variable gain control to set the amplitude of the chroma to be measured to the edge of the compass rose. the chroma to be measured to the edge of the compass rose. 4. Use the large knob to set the phase of the chroma to be measured 4. Use the large knob to set the phase of the chroma to be measured to the nine o’clock position on the vectorscope display. to the nine o’clock position on the vectorscope display. 5. Use the Waveform Vertical Position control to place the 5. Use the Waveform Vertical Position control to place the beginning of the trace on a convenient graticule reference line. beginning of the trace on a convenient graticule reference line. 6. Using the two-line display, differential phase and gain are 6. Using the two-line display, differential phase and gain are displayed simultaneously on the left and right portions of the displayed simultaneously on the left and right portions of the waveform monitor CRT. If necessary, adjust the vectorscope waveform monitor CRT. If necessary, adjust the vectorscope Variable Gain to vertically align the two displays. Variable Gain to vertically align the two displays. 7. Differential phase is the amount of the left signal that is above or 7. Differential phase is the amount of the left signal that is above or below the graticule reference line. Read the amount directly off below the graticule reference line. Read the amount directly off _ _ the graticule scale; 1 major division (10 IRE or 100 mV) = 1 . the graticule scale; 1 major division (10 IRE or 100 mV) = 1 . 8. Differential gain is the amount of the right signal that is above or 8. Differential gain is the amount of the right signal that is above or below the graticule reference line. Read the amount directly off below the graticule reference line. Read the amount directly off the graticule scale; 1 major division (10 IRE or 100 mV) = 1%. the graticule scale; 1 major division (10 IRE or 100 mV) = 1%.

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–15 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–15 Measurements Measurements

Noise Measurement Noise Measurement Enter Noise Measurement Mode Enter Noise Measurement Mode Push the MEASURE button to enable the Measurement menu, Push the MEASURE button to enable the Measurement menu, shown in Figure 4–1. shown in Figure 4–1. Touch on the screen. Touch on the screen.

Exit Noise Measurement Mode Exit Noise Measurement Mode To exit Noise mode, push the MEASURE button again. All To exit Noise mode, push the MEASURE button again. All instrument settings return to their previous state. instrument settings return to their previous state.

Noise Measurement Procedure Noise Measurement Procedure Input the signal to be measured to the 1780R-Series and display on Input the signal to be measured to the 1780R-Series and display on screen. screen. Noise can best be evaluated on a constant-luminance portion of the Noise can best be evaluated on a constant-luminance portion of the signal, such as back and front porch, sync tip, or color bars’ white signal, such as back and front porch, sync tip, or color bars’ white bar. bar. Adjust the large knob so that the gap between the waveforms just Adjust the large knob so that the gap between the waveforms just disappears. VAR GAIN is automatically set to maximum for lowest disappears. VAR GAIN is automatically set to maximum for lowest internal noise; Waveform X5 Gain can be selected for better internal noise; Waveform X5 Gain can be selected for better accuracy with low noise. accuracy with low noise. Read the signal / noise ratio directly from the on-screen readout. Read the signal / noise ratio directly from the on-screen readout.

4–16 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–16 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Measurements Measurements

ICPM Measurement ICPM Measurement Enter ICPM Measurement Mode Enter ICPM Measurement Mode (Incidental Carrier Phase Modulation) (Incidental Carrier Phase Modulation) Push the MEASURE button to enable the Measurement menu, Push the MEASURE button to enable the Measurement menu, shown in Figure 4–1. shown in Figure 4–1. Touch on the screen. Touch on the screen. The instrument is now configured as specified in Table 4–4. The instrument is now configured as specified in Table 4–4.

Table 4–4: ICPM Front-Panel Configuration Table 4–4: ICPM Front-Panel Configuration

VECTORSCOPE Selected by operator VECTORSCOPE Selected by operator WAVEFORM Waveform display enabled, other choices locked out WAVEFORM Waveform display enabled, other choices locked out INPUT Selected by operator INPUT Selected by operator REFERENCE Locked REFERENCE Locked FILTER Low pass FILTER Low pass WFM SWEEPS Locked WFM SWEEPS Locked MAGNIFIER Automatically set to X25, other choices may be selected by MAGNIFIER Automatically set to X25, other choices may be selected by operator. operator. GAINS Calibrated gains GAINS Calibrated gains WAVEFORM POSITION Horizontal and Vertical Position control settings selected by WAVEFORM POSITION Horizontal and Vertical Position control settings selected by operator are saved and reinstated each time the ICPM operator are saved and reinstated each time the ICPM mode is enabled. mode is enabled.

Exit ICPM Measurement Mode Exit ICPM Measurement Mode To exit ICPM mode, push the MEASURE button again. All To exit ICPM mode, push the MEASURE button again. All instrument settings return to their previous state. instrument settings return to their previous state.

ICPM Measurement Information ICPM Measurement Information ICPM is measured by observing an XY display of quadrature output ICPM is measured by observing an XY display of quadrature output of a 1450 demodulator versus the video signal itself. of a 1450 demodulator versus the video signal itself.

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–17 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–17 Measurements Measurements

The 1780R-Series ICPM measurement method is similar to the The 1780R-Series ICPM measurement method is similar to the Tektronix 1480-Series method. Refer to the 1450 manual for details Tektronix 1480-Series method. Refer to the 1450 manual for details on configuring the demodulator for this measurement. The external on configuring the demodulator for this measurement. The external low-pass filters (Tektronix P/N 015-0352-00) can be used to improve low-pass filters (Tektronix P/N 015-0352-00) can be used to improve the display. the display.

ICPM Measurement Procedure ICPM Measurement Procedure 1. Connect the Quadrature Out of the 1450 or TV1350 Demodulator 1. Connect the Quadrature Out of the 1450 or TV1350 Demodulator to the 1780R-Series EXT HORIZ Input and the Video Out to the to the 1780R-Series EXT HORIZ Input and the Video Out to the selected 1780R-Series input channel. selected 1780R-Series input channel. 2. Push the MEASURE button to enable the Measurement menu. 2. Push the MEASURE button to enable the Measurement menu. For in-service ICPM measurements, LINE SELECT can be used For in-service ICPM measurements, LINE SELECT can be used to select the desired line (zero reference pulse, then modulated to select the desired line (zero reference pulse, then modulated staircase signal.) For software versions 1.13 and up: LINE staircase signal.) For software versions 1.13 and up: LINE SELECT can be used to select two lines for an overlaid display. SELECT can be used to select two lines for an overlaid display. Push the front-panel LINE SELECT button, then touch the circle Push the front-panel LINE SELECT button, then touch the circle in the lower left portion of the vectorscope CRT to assign large in the lower left portion of the vectorscope CRT to assign large knob function. Select the line and field where the zero reference knob function. Select the line and field where the zero reference pulse is located. To select the second line, touch the circle in the pulse is located. To select the second line, touch the circle in the lower left portion of the waveform touch screen, and select the lower left portion of the waveform touch screen, and select the line and field where the modulated staircase signal is located. line and field where the modulated staircase signal is located. Touch the ICPM error readout area of the waveform CRT to Touch the ICPM error readout area of the waveform CRT to return the large knob assignment to the graticule, then proceed to return the large knob assignment to the graticule, then proceed to step 3. step 3. 3. Turn intensity to maximum, to locate the position of the trace off 3. Turn intensity to maximum, to locate the position of the trace off screen. Use the 1780R-Series Horizontal Position control to screen. Use the 1780R-Series Horizontal Position control to center the signal horizontally, and the Vertical Position control to center the signal horizontally, and the Vertical Position control to set the zero carrier reference point to the center of the electronic set the zero carrier reference point to the center of the electronic graticule plus mark (+). See Figure 4–5. Turn down intensity for graticule plus mark (+). See Figure 4–5. Turn down intensity for normal viewing. normal viewing. 4. If no ICPM is present on the carrier, the display between 4. If no ICPM is present on the carrier, the display between blanking and zero carrier will line up on the vertical axis. If blanking and zero carrier will line up on the vertical axis. If ICPM is present, the display will tilt. Use the precision control ICPM is present, the display will tilt. Use the precision control (large knob) to adjust the electronic graticule until it just touches (large knob) to adjust the electronic graticule until it just touches the portion of the signal with the greatest error. Adjust the the portion of the signal with the greatest error. Adjust the Magnification factor as needed to best view the error. Magnification factor as needed to best view the error.

4–18 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–18 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Measurements Measurements

5. The 1780R-Series on-screen readout shows the ICPM phase error 5. The 1780R-Series on-screen readout shows the ICPM phase error in degrees. in degrees.

Figure 4–5: Making ICPM Measurements Figure 4–5: Making ICPM Measurements

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–19 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–19 Measurements Measurements

K Factor Measurement K Factor Measurement Enter K Factor Mode Enter K Factor Mode Push the MEASURE button to enable the Measurement menu, Push the MEASURE button to enable the Measurement menu, shown in Figure 4–1. shown in Figure 4–1. Touch on the screen. Touch on the screen. K FACTOR is displayed on the left CRT. The input signal and K FACTOR is displayed on the left CRT. The input signal and electronic graticule are displayed on the right CRT. electronic graticule are displayed on the right CRT. The instrument is now configured as specified in Table 4–5 The instrument is now configured as specified in Table 4–5

Making K Factor Measurements Making K Factor Measurements 1. Use the Horizontal Position and the Waveform Var Gain as 1. Use the Horizontal Position and the Waveform Var Gain as needed to position the signal baseline on the dotted electronic needed to position the signal baseline on the dotted electronic graticule line and position the top of the pulse at the center of the graticule line and position the top of the pulse at the center of the electronic graticule plus sign (+). See Figure 4–6. electronic graticule plus sign (+). See Figure 4–6. 2. Use the large knob to adjust the electronic K Factor graticule 2. Use the large knob to adjust the electronic K Factor graticule outline to just touch the point of greatest signal error. outline to just touch the point of greatest signal error. a. Use X5 Gain as needed to view the signal. To ensure a a. Use X5 Gain as needed to view the signal. To ensure a calibrated graticule, if the Var Gain was employed while calibrated graticule, if the Var Gain was employed while in X1 Gain, it must remain on while in X5 Gain. in X1 Gain, it must remain on while in X5 Gain.

3. Read the K2T Factor error in percent on the CRT readout. 3. Read the K2T Factor error in percent on the CRT readout.

4–20 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–20 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Measurements Measurements

Right CRT display Right CRT display

Left CRT display Left CRT display

Figure 4–6: K Factor Electronic Graticule Figure 4–6: K Factor Electronic Graticule

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–21 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–21 Measurements Measurements

Table 4–5: K Factor Front-Panel Configuration Table 4–5: K Factor Front-Panel Configuration

VECTORSCOPE Selected by operator VECTORSCOPE Selected by operator WAVEFORM Waveform display enabled, choices locked out WAVEFORM Waveform display enabled, choices locked out INPUT Selected by operator INPUT Selected by operator REFERENCE Status does not change REFERENCE Status does not change FILTER Status does not change FILTER Status does not change WFM SWEEPS One Line sweep selected, other choices may be selected by WFM SWEEPS One Line sweep selected, other choices may be selected by operator. operator. GAINS VAR Waveform gain selected GAINS VAR Waveform gain selected WAVEFORM POSITION Horizontal and Vertical Position control settings selected by WAVEFORM POSITION Horizontal and Vertical Position control settings selected by operator are saved and reinstated each time the ICPM operator are saved and reinstated each time the ICPM mode is enabled. mode is enabled. VOLTAGE & TIMING Both voltage and timing cursors are available in K Factor VOLTAGE & TIMING Both voltage and timing cursors are available in K Factor CURSORS measurement mode. CURSORS measurement mode.

4–22 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–22 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Measurements Measurements

Chroma / Luma Inequalities Measurement Chroma / Luma Inequalities Measurement Enter Chroma / Luma Mode Enter Chroma / Luma Mode Push the MEASURE button to enable the Measurement menu, Push the MEASURE button to enable the Measurement menu, shown in Figure 4–1. shown in Figure 4–1. Touch on the screen. Touch on the screen. Vectorscope and waveform displays are enabled and the instrument Vectorscope and waveform displays are enabled and the instrument is now configured as shown in Figure 4–7 and Table 4–6. is now configured as shown in Figure 4–7 and Table 4–6.

Exit Chroma / Luma Mode Exit Chroma / Luma Mode To exit Chroma / Luma mode, push the MEASURE button again. All To exit Chroma / Luma mode, push the MEASURE button again. All instrument settings return to their previous state. instrument settings return to their previous state. Horizontal positions, vertical positions, and gain settings defined Horizontal positions, vertical positions, and gain settings defined while in Chroma / Luma mode will be stored and reinstated when while in Chroma / Luma mode will be stored and reinstated when this mode is selected again. this mode is selected again.

Cursors in Chroma / Luma Cursors in Chroma / Luma Ensure that is selected. Ensure that is selected. The cursors may be used to extract nomograph data from the The cursors may be used to extract nomograph data from the 1780R-Series instrument. Five cursor settings must be entered by the 1780R-Series instrument. Five cursor settings must be entered by the operator, using the waveform monitor CRT. Readout in the upper operator, using the waveform monitor CRT. Readout in the upper right corner of CRT guides operator through the five settings, which right corner of CRT guides operator through the five settings, which are described in the following procedure. are described in the following procedure.

Making Chroma / Luma Measurements (Using Cursors) Making Chroma / Luma Measurements (Using Cursors) 1. Select Pulse Width 1. Select Pulse Width a. Touch <12.5T>, <25T>, or for NTSC. Touch a. Touch <12.5T>, <25T>, or for NTSC. Touch <10>, <20>, or for PAL. Chroma / Luma gain <10>, <20>, or for PAL. Chroma / Luma gain error readings are not affected by pulse width. error readings are not affected by pulse width. 2. Set Pulse Amplitude 2. Set Pulse Amplitude a. Adjust Horizontal Position and Magnification to place the a. Adjust Horizontal Position and Magnification to place the modulated sine-squared pulse on screen. modulated sine-squared pulse on screen. b. Set Cursor 1 to the pulse top. Set Cursor 2 to the baseline. b. Set Cursor 1 to the pulse top. Set Cursor 2 to the baseline. c. Touch . c. Touch .

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–23 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–23 Measurements Measurements

Right CRT display Right CRT display

Left CRT display Left CRT display

Figure 4–7: Initial Chroma / Luma Inequalities Measurement Screen Figure 4–7: Initial Chroma / Luma Inequalities Measurement Screen

4–24 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–24 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Measurements Measurements

Table 4–6: Chroma / Luma Front-Panel Configuration Table 4–6: Chroma / Luma Front-Panel Configuration

VECTORSCOPE Vector display initially enabled, other choices locked out. VECTORSCOPE Vector display initially enabled, other choices locked out. Chroma-to-Luma Lissajous display selected by touching Chroma-to-Luma Lissajous display selected by touching area of screen. area of screen. WAVEFORM Waveform display enabled, other choices locked out. WAVEFORM Waveform display enabled, other choices locked out. INPUT Status does not change. All differential modes locked out; if INPUT Status does not change. All differential modes locked out; if a differential mode was enabled, input is forced to CH A. a differential mode was enabled, input is forced to CH A. REFERENCE Status does not change. REFERENCE Status does not change. FILTER Flat filter automatically selected. Other choices locked out. FILTER Flat filter automatically selected. Other choices locked out. WFM SWEEPS Sweep settings (typically X10 or X20 Mag) selected by WFM SWEEPS Sweep settings (typically X10 or X20 Mag) selected by operator are saved and re instated each time the Chroma / operator are saved and re instated each time the Chroma / Luma mode is enabled. Luma mode is enabled. GAINS Vectorscope and Waveform gain settings selected by GAINS Vectorscope and Waveform gain settings selected by operator are saved and reinstated each time the Chroma / operator are saved and reinstated each time the Chroma / Luma mode is enabled. Luma mode is enabled. WAVEFORM POSITION Horizontal and Vertical Position control settings selected by WAVEFORM POSITION Horizontal and Vertical Position control settings selected by operator are saved and reinstated each time the Chroma / operator are saved and reinstated each time the Chroma / Luma mode is enabled. Luma mode is enabled. VOLTAGE & TIMING Voltage cursors are automatically enabled. Cursors can be VOLTAGE & TIMING Voltage cursors are automatically enabled. Cursors can be CURSORS used to extract stored nomograph data. CURSORS used to extract stored nomograph data.

3. Set Left Lobe Amplitude 3. Set Left Lobe Amplitude a. Position Cursor 1 on the point of the left lobe that is a. Position Cursor 1 on the point of the left lobe that is furthest from the baseline. Leave Cursor 2 on the baseline. furthest from the baseline. Leave Cursor 2 on the baseline. b. Touch . b. Touch . 4. Set Right Lobe Amplitude 4. Set Right Lobe Amplitude a. Position Cursor 1 on the point of the right lobe that is a. Position Cursor 1 on the point of the right lobe that is furthest from the baseline. If no right lobe is present furthest from the baseline. If no right lobe is present (indicating no delay error), set Cursor 1 to the baseline. (indicating no delay error), set Cursor 1 to the baseline. Leave Cursor 2 on the baseline. Leave Cursor 2 on the baseline. b. Touch . b. Touch . 5. Set Modulated Sine-squared Pulse H.A.D. 5. Set Modulated Sine-squared Pulse H.A.D.

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–25 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–25 Measurements Measurements

If OTHER was selected on Step 1, this step allows the 1780R-Se- If OTHER was selected on Step 1, this step allows the 1780R-Se- ries instrument to determine the pulse width and adjust the ries instrument to determine the pulse width and adjust the readout accordingly. readout accordingly. a. Voltage cursors are automatically set to 50% of the a. Voltage cursors are automatically set to 50% of the amplitude entered in step 2. amplitude entered in step 2. b. Timing cursors are enabled and appear as bright-up dots b. Timing cursors are enabled and appear as bright-up dots on the display. Large knob now controls timing cursor on the display. Large knob now controls timing cursor position. position. c. Adjust Timing Cursor 1 to the point where the pulse signal c. Adjust Timing Cursor 1 to the point where the pulse signal intersects the approximate 50% amplitude level identified intersects the approximate 50% amplitude level identified by the Voltage Cursor. by the Voltage Cursor. d. Adjust Timing Cursor 2 to the point where the opposite d. Adjust Timing Cursor 2 to the point where the opposite side of the pulse signal intersects the Voltage Cursor. See side of the pulse signal intersects the Voltage Cursor. See Figure 4–8. Figure 4–8.

Figure 4–8: Setting Timing Cursors to Pulse Width Figure 4–8: Setting Timing Cursors to Pulse Width

4–26 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–26 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Measurements Measurements

Chroma / Luma Measurements with Lissajous Display Chroma / Luma Measurements with Lissajous Display The Lissajous display is an X/Y plot of the sine-squared luminance The Lissajous display is an X/Y plot of the sine-squared luminance pulse versus the sine-squared envelope of the demodulated pulse versus the sine-squared envelope of the demodulated chrominance. This display is useful when signals have previously chrominance. This display is useful when signals have previously been transcoded into a component format, so that R–Y and B–Y may been transcoded into a component format, so that R–Y and B–Y may be unequally delayed with respect to luminance. be unequally delayed with respect to luminance. While still in the Chroma / Luma measurement mode, touch While still in the Chroma / Luma measurement mode, touch to outline . to outline . Set large knob function to phase control by touching the Set large knob function to phase control by touching the area of the vectorscope CRT. area of the vectorscope CRT. Using the large knob to set phase, set the burst vector to the Using the large knob to set phase, set the burst vector to the 9 o’clock position for an R–Y versus luminance display, or to the 9 o’clock position for an R–Y versus luminance display, or to the 6 o’clock position for a B–Y versus luminance display. 6 o’clock position for a B–Y versus luminance display. If there are no chrominance-to-luminance errors, the Lissajous If there are no chrominance-to-luminance errors, the Lissajous _ _ display will show a straight line at 45 . display will show a straight line at 45 . Phase delay causes separation of the display. Phase delay causes separation of the display. Gain inequalities cause displacement of the display end points. Gain inequalities cause displacement of the display end points.

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–27 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–27 Measurements Measurements

Short-Time Distortion Measurement Short-Time Distortion Measurement Enter Short-Time Distortion Mode Enter Short-Time Distortion Mode Push the MEASURE button to enable the Measurement menu, Push the MEASURE button to enable the Measurement menu, shown in Figure 4–1. shown in Figure 4–1. Touch on the screen. Touch on the screen. Vectorscope and waveform displays are enabled and the instrument Vectorscope and waveform displays are enabled and the instrument is now configured as shown in Figure 4–9 and Table 4–7. is now configured as shown in Figure 4–9 and Table 4–7.

Exit Short-Time Distortion Measurement Mode Exit Short-Time Distortion Measurement Mode To exit the Short-Time Distortion mode, push the MEASURE button To exit the Short-Time Distortion mode, push the MEASURE button again. All instrument settings return to their previous state. again. All instrument settings return to their previous state.

Short-Time Distortion Measurement Procedure Short-Time Distortion Measurement Procedure Use the Vertical and Horizontal Position controls and the Waveform Use the Vertical and Horizontal Position controls and the Waveform VAR gain to position the signal as follows: The signal baseline goes VAR gain to position the signal as follows: The signal baseline goes through the graticule “+” at the lower left of the CRT, the rising edge through the graticule “+” at the lower left of the CRT, the rising edge goes through the “+” at center screen, and the top of the signal goes goes through the “+” at center screen, and the top of the signal goes through the “+” in the upper right of the screen. See Figure 4–9. through the “+” in the upper right of the screen. See Figure 4–9. Use the large knob to adjust the electronic graticule to just touch the Use the large knob to adjust the electronic graticule to just touch the signal at the point of greatest error. signal at the point of greatest error. Obtain the Short-Time Distortion error from the on-screen readout, Obtain the Short-Time Distortion error from the on-screen readout, which is given in percent of the overall bar signal amplitude. which is given in percent of the overall bar signal amplitude.

4–28 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–28 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Measurements Measurements

Right CRT display Right CRT display

Left CRT display Left CRT display

Figure 4–9: Short-Time Distortion Electronic Graticule Figure 4–9: Short-Time Distortion Electronic Graticule

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–29 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–29 Measurements Measurements

Table 4–7: Short-Time Distortion Mode Front-Panel Configuration Table 4–7: Short-Time Distortion Mode Front-Panel Configuration

VECTORSCOPE Selected by operator VECTORSCOPE Selected by operator WAVEFORM Waveform display enabled, other choices may be selected WAVEFORM Waveform display enabled, other choices may be selected by operator by operator INPUT Status does not change INPUT Status does not change REFERENCE Status does not change REFERENCE Status does not change FILTER Flat is selected, other choices are locked up FILTER Flat is selected, other choices are locked up WFM SWEEPS One Line selected WFM SWEEPS One Line selected GAINS Waveform VAR is selected GAINS Waveform VAR is selected WAVEFORM POSITION Horizontal and Vertical Position control settings selected by WAVEFORM POSITION Horizontal and Vertical Position control settings selected by operator are saved and reinstated each time the Short-Time operator are saved and reinstated each time the Short-Time Distortion mode is enabled Distortion mode is enabled VOLTAGE & TIMING Both Voltage and Timing cursors are available VOLTAGE & TIMING Both Voltage and Timing cursors are available CURSORS CURSORS

4–30 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–30 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Measurements Measurements

R–Y Sweep Measurement R–Y Sweep Measurement Enter R–Y Sweep Mode Enter R–Y Sweep Mode Push the MEASURE button to enable the Measurement menu, Push the MEASURE button to enable the Measurement menu, shown in Figure 4–1. shown in Figure 4–1. Touch on the screen. Touch on the screen. Vectorscope and waveform displays are enabled and the instrument Vectorscope and waveform displays are enabled and the instrument is now configured as shown in Table 4–8. is now configured as shown in Table 4–8.

Table 4–8: R–Y Sweep Mode Front-Panel Configuration Table 4–8: R–Y Sweep Mode Front-Panel Configuration

VECTORSCOPE Vector or SCH Selected by operator. Other choices locked. VECTORSCOPE Vector or SCH Selected by operator. Other choices locked. WAVEFORM Waveform display enabled, other choices locked. WAVEFORM Waveform display enabled, other choices locked. INPUT Status does not change INPUT Status does not change REFERENCE Status does not change REFERENCE Status does not change FILTER Locked FILTER Locked WFM SWEEPS Two Field is selected. Other choices may be made by WFM SWEEPS Two Field is selected. Other choices may be made by operator. operator. GAINS Gain control settings selected by operator are saved and GAINS Gain control settings selected by operator are saved and reinstated each time the R–Y Sweep mode is enabled. reinstated each time the R–Y Sweep mode is enabled. WAVEFORM POSITION Horizontal and Vertical Position control settings selected by WAVEFORM POSITION Horizontal and Vertical Position control settings selected by operator are saved and reinstated each time the R–Y operator are saved and reinstated each time the R–Y Sweep mode is enabled. Sweep mode is enabled. VOLTAGE & TIMING Both Voltage and Timing cursors are available VOLTAGE & TIMING Both Voltage and Timing cursors are available CURSORS CURSORS

Exit R–Y Sweep Measurement Mode Exit R–Y Sweep Measurement Mode To exit the R–Y Sweep mode, push the MEASURE button again. All To exit the R–Y Sweep mode, push the MEASURE button again. All instrument settings return to their previous state. instrument settings return to their previous state.

R–Y Sweep Mode Information R–Y Sweep Mode Information The 1780R-Series R–Y Sweep mode provides a voltage-versus-time The 1780R-Series R–Y Sweep mode provides a voltage-versus-time display (on the waveform monitor CRT) of the vectorscope R–Y display (on the waveform monitor CRT) of the vectorscope R–Y demodulator output. demodulator output.

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–31 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–31 Measurements Measurements

Using R–Y Sweep Mode Using R–Y Sweep Mode _ _ 1. Set the burst to 180 on the vector graticule. The R–Y compo- 1. Set the burst to 180 on the vector graticule. The R–Y compo- nent of the input signal is viewed on the waveform CRT. nent of the input signal is viewed on the waveform CRT. 2. Set the front-panel VECT / SCH INPUT selection to SCH, and 2. Set the front-panel VECT / SCH INPUT selection to SCH, and the SCH Phase component is added to the R–Y display. The SCH the SCH Phase component is added to the R–Y display. The SCH Phase display is proportional to the amplitude of the R–Y display, Phase display is proportional to the amplitude of the R–Y display, and has a rise time of approximately 70 horizontal lines. and has a rise time of approximately 70 horizontal lines. 3. With a Field rate sweep selected, the location and relative 3. With a Field rate sweep selected, the location and relative magnitude of the field rate SCH Phase errors are viewed. If no magnitude of the field rate SCH Phase errors are viewed. If no SCH Phase errors are present, the display will be flat for NTSC. SCH Phase errors are present, the display will be flat for NTSC. For PAL, the display consists of a perfect 25 Hz sine wave, with For PAL, the display consists of a perfect 25 Hz sine wave, with SCH Phase errors seen as deviations from the sine wave. SCH Phase errors seen as deviations from the sine wave.

4–32 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–32 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Measurements Measurements

Bowtie Measurement Bowtie Measurement Use the following information to perform bowtie measurements. Use the following information to perform bowtie measurements.

Enter Bowtie Measurement Mode Enter Bowtie Measurement Mode Push the MEASURE button to enable the Measurement menu, Push the MEASURE button to enable the Measurement menu, shown in Figure 4–1. shown in Figure 4–1. Touch on the screen. Touch on the screen. BOWTIE is displayed on the left CRT. The CH B1–B2 and CH BOWTIE is displayed on the left CRT. The CH B1–B2 and CH B1–B3 signals are displayed on the right CRT. The instrument is B1–B3 signals are displayed on the right CRT. The instrument is now configured as specified in Table 4–9 and Figure 4–10. now configured as specified in Table 4–9 and Figure 4–10. The large knob has no function in Bowtie mode. The large knob has no function in Bowtie mode.

Bowtie Measurement Procedure Bowtie Measurement Procedure 1. To check for timing and relative amplitude errors in a three-wire 1. To check for timing and relative amplitude errors in a three-wire signal path, route a Bowtie test signal from a generator, through signal path, route a Bowtie test signal from a generator, through the signal path, to the 1780R-Series CH B1, CH B2, and CH B3 the signal path, to the 1780R-Series CH B1, CH B2, and CH B3 Inputs. Inputs. 2. Push the MEASURE button, then touch on screen. 2. Push the MEASURE button, then touch on screen. 3. Check for a sharp null in the center of each half of the two-line 3. Check for a sharp null in the center of each half of the two-line signal display. The timing marker details in the waveform are an signal display. The timing marker details in the waveform are an electronic graticule for calibration of the timing offsets. The electronic graticule for calibration of the timing offsets. The center (taller) pulse is the 0 time error mark. Each mark away center (taller) pulse is the 0 time error mark. Each mark away from center indicates 20 ns of relative timing error. The left half from center indicates 20 ns of relative timing error. The left half compares CH B1 with CH B2, and the right half compares compares CH B1 with CH B2, and the right half compares CH B1 with CH B3. CH B1 with CH B3. 4. A broad null indicates unequal amplitudes between signals. 4. A broad null indicates unequal amplitudes between signals.

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–33 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–33 Measurements Measurements

Right CRT display Right CRT display

Left CRT display Left CRT display

Figure 4–10: Bowtie Measurement Screen Figure 4–10: Bowtie Measurement Screen

4–34 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–34 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Measurements Measurements

Table 4–9: Bowtie Mode Front-Panel Configuration Table 4–9: Bowtie Mode Front-Panel Configuration

VECTORSCOPE Selected by operator VECTORSCOPE Selected by operator WAVEFORM Parade selected, other choices locked WAVEFORM Parade selected, other choices locked INPUT B1–B2 & B1–B3 selected, other choices locked INPUT B1–B2 & B1–B3 selected, other choices locked REFERENCE Status does not change REFERENCE Status does not change FILTER Status does not change FILTER Status does not change WFM SWEEPS Two Line selected, other choices locked WFM SWEEPS Two Line selected, other choices locked GAINS Gain setting selected by operator are saved and reinstated GAINS Gain setting selected by operator are saved and reinstated each time the Bowtie measurement mode is enabled each time the Bowtie measurement mode is enabled WAVEFORM POSITION Horizontal and Vertical Position control settings selected by WAVEFORM POSITION Horizontal and Vertical Position control settings selected by operator are saved and reinstated each time the Bowtie operator are saved and reinstated each time the Bowtie measurement mode is enabled measurement mode is enabled TIMING CURSORS Timing cursors are available TIMING CURSORS Timing cursors are available

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–35 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–35 Measurements Measurements

FSC Time Marks Measurement FSC Time Marks Measurement

Enter FSC Time Marks Measurement Mode Enter FSC Time Marks Measurement Mode Push the MEASURE button to enable the Measurement menu, Push the MEASURE button to enable the Measurement menu, shown in Figure 4–1. shown in Figure 4–1. Touch on the screen. Touch on the screen. The large knob function is assigned to phase shift. The large knob function is assigned to phase shift. The instrument is now configured as specified in Table 4–10. The instrument is now configured as specified in Table 4–10.

Table 4–10: FSC Time Marks Front-Panel Configuration Table 4–10: FSC Time Marks Front-Panel Configuration

VECTORSCOPE SCH display automatically enabled; other choices may be VECTORSCOPE SCH display automatically enabled; other choices may be selected by operator. selected by operator. WAVEFORM Waveform display enabled, other choices may be selected WAVEFORM Waveform display enabled, other choices may be selected by operator. by operator. INPUT Status does not change. INPUT Status does not change. REFERENCE Status does not change. REFERENCE Status does not change. FILTER Status does not change. FILTER Status does not change. WFM SWEEPS Sweep and Mag settings selected by operator are saved WFM SWEEPS Sweep and Mag settings selected by operator are saved and reinstated each time the FSC time marks mode is and reinstated each time the FSC time marks mode is enabled. enabled. GAINS Gain settings selected by operator are saved and reinstated GAINS Gain settings selected by operator are saved and reinstated each time the FSC time marks mode is enabled. each time the FSC time marks mode is enabled. WAVEFORM POSITION Horizontal and Vertical Position control settings selected by WAVEFORM POSITION Horizontal and Vertical Position control settings selected by operator are saved and reinstated each time the FSC time operator are saved and reinstated each time the FSC time marks mode is enabled. marks mode is enabled. TIMING CURSORS Timing Cursors are not available. TIMING CURSORS Timing Cursors are not available.

Exit FSC Time Marks Measurement Mode Exit FSC Time Marks Measurement Mode To exit FSC Time Marks mode, push the MEASURE button again. To exit FSC Time Marks mode, push the MEASURE button again. All instrument settings return to their previous state. All instrument settings return to their previous state. Phase set while in Time Marks mode is stored and reinstated each Phase set while in Time Marks mode is stored and reinstated each time this mode is selected. time this mode is selected.

4–36 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–36 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Measurements Measurements

Making SCH Phase Measurements Making SCH Phase Measurements The 1780R-Series offers two methods of measuring SCH phase The 1780R-Series offers two methods of measuring SCH phase errors: The polar SCH display, and this FSC Time Marks (voltage-vs- errors: The polar SCH display, and this FSC Time Marks (voltage-vs- time) method. The FSC time marks display is more direct than the time) method. The FSC time marks display is more direct than the polar display, and affords the operator more manual control, but may polar display, and affords the operator more manual control, but may provide a less precise measurement. To ensure an accurate provide a less precise measurement. To ensure an accurate measurement, both methods can be used. measurement, both methods can be used. 1. Adjust the waveform monitor controls for a high resolution 1. Adjust the waveform monitor controls for a high resolution display of sync. display of sync. 2. Adjust the large knob until one of the bright-up dots is at the 50% 2. Adjust the large knob until one of the bright-up dots is at the 50% point of the leading edge of sync on the waveform display. point of the leading edge of sync on the waveform display. 3. Push the front-panel REFERENCE SET button. The phase 3. Push the front-panel REFERENCE SET button. The phase _ _ readout is now 0.00 . readout is now 0.00 . 4. Adjust the large knob until the dots are on the zero crossing (or 4. Adjust the large knob until the dots are on the zero crossing (or 50% point) of burst on the waveform display. 50% point) of burst on the waveform display. 5. The vectorscope CRT readout now gives SCH phase error in 5. The vectorscope CRT readout now gives SCH phase error in degrees. degrees.

Voltage Cursors in FSC Time Marks Mode Voltage Cursors in FSC Time Marks Mode While in Time Marks mode, push the front-panel VOLTAGE While in Time Marks mode, push the front-panel VOLTAGE CURSOR button. A voltage cursor menu appears on the right side of CURSOR button. A voltage cursor menu appears on the right side of the vectorscope CRT. Touch or the vectorscope CRT. Touch or to toggle between those voltage cursor to toggle between those voltage cursor functions. Refer to the section on Voltage Cursors in Section 3 of this functions. Refer to the section on Voltage Cursors in Section 3 of this manual for more details. manual for more details.

Verifying Burst Position Verifying Burst Position

The FSC time marks display can be used to verify that burst is The FSC time marks display can be used to verify that burst is located 19 subcarrier cycles from the 50% point of the leading edge located 19 subcarrier cycles from the 50% point of the leading edge of sync. of sync. Position one of the dots on the 50% point of sync, and count the Position one of the dots on the 50% point of sync, and count the number of dots between that dot and the dot on the zero crossing of number of dots between that dot and the dot on the zero crossing of the first full cycle of burst. the first full cycle of burst.

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–37 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–37 Measurements Measurements

Other Measurements Other Measurements The 1780R-Series instruments are capable of other measurements The 1780R-Series instruments are capable of other measurements not described in this manual, such as Group Delay and Chrominance not described in this manual, such as Group Delay and Chrominance Non-Linear Phase and Gain. These measurements and others are Non-Linear Phase and Gain. These measurements and others are covered in the book, Television Measurements, available through covered in the book, Television Measurements, available through Tektronix Customer Support. Tektronix Customer Support.

4–38 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 4–38 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Specifications Specifications

Specifications Specifications

Table 5–1: Input/Output Table 5–1: Input/Output

Performance Supplemental Performance Supplemental Characteristics Requirements Information Characteristics Requirements Information Vertical Ranges Vertical Ranges Volts Full Scale Volts Full Scale 1.0 Accuracy – 1.0 V ±0.007 V. P-to-P Amplitude for Full 1.0 Accuracy – 1.0 V ±0.007 V. P-to-P Amplitude for Full Graticule. Graticule. 1.0 volt / 140 IRE. 1.0 volt / 140 IRE. Var ≤0.5:1 to ≥1.5:1 (0.67 V to Var ≤0.5:1 to ≥1.5:1 (0.67 V to 2.0 V input signal can be 2.0 V input signal can be made full scale). made full scale). Input Gain Ratios Input Gain Ratios A to B 1:1 ±0.002 (0.998 – 1.002) A to B 1:1 ±0.002 (0.998 – 1.002) AUX VIDEO IN to A 1.5 dB ±0.3 dB AUX VIDEO IN to A 1.5 dB ±0.3 dB Input Input Input A to AUX VIDEO 1:1 ±0.005 (0.995 – 1.005) Input A to AUX VIDEO 1:1 ±0.005 (0.995 – 1.005) OUT OUT Input A to PIX MON 1:1 ±0.02 (0.98 – 1.02) Input A to PIX MON 1:1 ±0.02 (0.98 – 1.02) OUT OUT Vertical Magnifier Vertical Magnifier X5 Accuracy 0.2 V ±0.007 V. X5 Accuracy 0.2 V ±0.007 V. P-to-P Amplitude for 0.2 volt / 28 IRE. P-to-P Amplitude for 0.2 volt / 28 IRE. Full Graticule Full Graticule Maximum Input Signal Maximum Input Signal AC Couple All Inputs 2.0 V, p-to-p, 10% – 90% APL. Aux Video Out and Pix Mon AC Couple All Inputs 2.0 V, p-to-p, 10% – 90% APL. Aux Video Out and Pix Mon (terminated), 1.0 V p-to-p, (terminated), 1.0 V p-to-p, 10% – 90% APL. 10% – 90% APL. DC Couple All Inputs ±1.5 V (DC + peak AC). DC Couple All Inputs ±1.5 V (DC + peak AC).

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 5–1 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 5–1 Specifications Specifications

Table 5–1: Input/Output (Cont.) Table 5–1: Input/Output (Cont.)

Performance Supplemental Performance Supplemental Characteristics Requirements Information Characteristics Requirements Information Max volts from Loop- 2 V rms at mains frequency. Rejection ratio of common- Max volts from Loop- 2 V rms at mains frequency. Rejection ratio of common- Through common to-chassis in floating Through common to-chassis in floating terminal to chassis ground mode, ≥34 dB at terminal to chassis ground mode, ≥34 dB at mains frequency. mains frequency. Max DC Output Voltage Max DC Output Voltage Aux Video Out ±0.5 V into 75 W. Aux Video Out ±0.5 V into 75 W. Pix Mon Out ±0.5 V into 75 W. Pix Mon Out ±0.5 V into 75 W. Line strobe; no input signal. Line strobe; no input signal. Remote Control Remote Control Interface Standard RS232 / RS422. Interface Standard RS232 / RS422. Control Enable Ground Closures and Pre- Control Enable Ground Closures and Pre- sets. sets.

Table 5–2: Waveform Monitor Vertical System Table 5–2: Waveform Monitor Vertical System

Performance Supplemental Performance Supplemental Characteristics Requirements Information Characteristics Requirements Information Return Loss Return Loss CH A, B1, B2, or B3 >40 dB DC to 5 MHz. (Terminated in 75 W.) CH A, B1, B2, or B3 >40 dB DC to 5 MHz. (Terminated in 75 W.) Aux Video In, Aux >34 dB DC to 5 MHz. Instrument On only. Aux Video In, Aux >34 dB DC to 5 MHz. Instrument On only. Video Out, & Pix Mon Video Out, & Pix Mon Out Out Ext. Sync Input >46 dB to 5 MHz. Ext. Sync Input >46 dB to 5 MHz.

Loop-Through Isolation >80 dB at FSC, between Loop-Through Isolation >80 dB at FSC, between channels and between channels and between each channel and EXT each channel and EXT REF. Measured externally. REF. Measured externally.

5–2 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 5–2 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Specifications Specifications

Table 5–2: Waveform Monitor Vertical System (Cont.) Table 5–2: Waveform Monitor Vertical System (Cont.)

Performance Supplemental Performance Supplemental Characteristics Requirements Information Characteristics Requirements Information Crosstalk Typically 70 dB isolation Crosstalk Typically 70 dB isolation between channels. Mea- between channels. Mea- sured at FSC between sured at FSC between channels and each channel channels and each channel and EXT REF. and EXT REF. Frequency Response Frequency Response Flat (X1) From 50 kHz Reference: Flat (X1) From 50 kHz Reference: 50 kHz – 5 MHz 1 Volt Full Scale, Variable 50 kHz – 5 MHz 1 Volt Full Scale, Variable GffAdsedfrm-Gain off. Adjusted for mini- GffAdsedfrm-Gain off. Adjusted for mini- Input Ch A, B1, ±1%. Input Ch A, B1, ±1%. mal Luminance/Chromi- mal Luminance/Chromi- B2, & B3 B2, & B3 nance gain erro r. T ypically nance gain erro r. Typically AUX IN, AUX OUT ±2%. <0.5%. AUX IN, AUX OUT ±2%. <0.5%. 5 MHz – 10 MHz 1 Volt Full Scale, Variable 5 MHz – 10 MHz 1 Volt Full Scale, Variable GffGain off. GffGain off. Input Ch A +1%. Input Ch A +1%. Input Ch B1, B2, ±2%. Input Ch B1, B2, ±2%. and B3 and B3 AUX IN, AUX OUT ±2%. AUX IN, AUX OUT ±2%. 10 MHz – 15 MHz 1 Volt Full Scale, Variable 10 MHz – 15 MHz 1 Volt Full Scale, Variable GffGain off. GffGain off. Input Ch A, B1, +2%, –5%. Input Ch A, B1, +2%, –5%. B2, & B3 B2, & B3 15 MHz – 20 MHz 1 Volt Full Scale, Variable 15 MHz – 20 MHz 1 Volt Full Scale, Variable Gff3dGain off. –3 dB at Gff3dGain off. –3 dB at Input Ch A, B1, +2%, –15%. Input Ch A, B1, +2%, –15%. >20 MHz. >20 MHz. B2, & B3 B2, & B3 Lum/Chroma Gain ±0.5% X5 Gain, Modulated Sin2 Lum/Chroma Gain ±0.5% X5 Gain, Modulated Sin2 Pulse (12.5T NTSC, 10T Pulse (12.5T NTSC, 10T PAL). PAL). Voltage Cursor Voltage Cursor Accuracy 0.2%. Accuracy 0.2%. Resolution 1 mV. Resolution 1 mV.

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 5–3 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 5–3 Specifications Specifications

Table 5–2: Waveform Monitor Vertical System (Cont.) Table 5–2: Waveform Monitor Vertical System (Cont.)

Performance Supplemental Performance Supplemental Characteristics Requirements Information Characteristics Requirements Information Cal Amplitude Cal Amplitude Accuracy 1.00 V ±0.2%. NTSC 0.714 V ±0.5%. Accuracy 1.00 V ±0.2%. NTSC 0.714 V ±0.5%. Resolution 1 mV at 1.00 V. PAL 0.700 V ±0.5%. Resolution 1 mV at 1.00 V. PAL 0.700 V ±0.5%. DC Restorer DC Restorer Clamp Point Back porch or Sync Tip. Clamp Point Back porch or Sync Tip. Mains Hum Atten. Attenuation 10%. Mains Hum Atten. Attenuation 10%. Slow Clamp ≤0.9 dB. Slow Clamp ≤0.9 dB. Fast Clamp ≥26 dB. Fast Clamp ≥26 dB. Shift caused by pres- NTSC = 1 IRE. Shift caused by pres- NTSC = 1 IRE. ence or absence of PAL = ≤7 mV. ence or absence of PAL = ≤7 mV. burst burst Lum/Chroma Gain Ratio Lum/Chroma Gain Ratio NTSC 1:1 ±1%. Adjust to minimize lumi- NTSC 1:1 ±1%. Adjust to minimize lumi- (50 kHz – 3.58 MHz) nance-to-chrominance gain (50 kHz – 3.58 MHz) nance-to-chrominance gain erro r at 1 V Full Scale , erro r at 1 V Full Scal e, PAL 1:1 ±1%. PAL 1:1 ±1%. typically ≤0.5%. typically ≤0.5%. (50 kHz – 4.43 MHz) (50 kHz – 4.43 MHz) Noise Measurements Noise Measurements

Accuracy To 56 dB within 1 dB. Relative to 700 mVRMS. Accuracy To 56 dB within 1 dB. Relative to 700 mVRMS. To 60 dB within 2 dB. VAR GAIN adjusted to To 60 dB within 2 dB. VAR GAIN adjusted to maximum. maximum. Offset Accuracy To 56 dB within 0.5 dB. Offset Accuracy To 56 dB within 0.5 dB. To 60 dB within 1 dB. To 60 dB within 1 dB.

5–4 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 5–4 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Specifications Specifications

Table 5–2: Waveform Monitor Vertical System (Cont.) Table 5–2: Waveform Monitor Vertical System (Cont.)

Performance Supplemental Performance Supplemental Characteristics Requirements Information Characteristics Requirements Information Vertical Vertical Overscan Baseline Distortion <7 mV variation in baseline of 1 V p-to-p PAL or NTSC Baseline Distortion <7 mV variation in baseline of 1 V p-to-p PAL or NTSC chroma when positioned any- Modulated Sin2 composite chroma when positioned any- Modulated Sin2 composite where between sync tip and video signal (12.5T NTSC, where between sync tip and video signal (12.5T NTSC, 100% white. 10T PAL). 100% white. 10T PAL). 1.0 or X5, Variable Gain off. 1.0 or X5, Variable Gain off. Typically <0.5%. Typically <0.5%. DC Channel Matching Typically within 30 mV. DC Channel Matching Typically within 30 mV. Common Mode Rejection A – B1 B1 – B2 / 1 V p-to-p common mode Common Mode Rejection A – B1 B1 – B2 / 1 V p-to-p common mode B1 – B3 signal. B1 – B3 signal. 60 Hz ≥46 dB ≥46 dB 60 Hz ≥46 dB ≥46 dB 15 kHz (Lum) ≥46 dB ≥46 dB 15 kHz (Lum) ≥46 dB ≥46 dB 1 MHz ≥40 dB ≥34 dB A – B1 typically 1 MHz ≥40 dB ≥34 dB A – B1 typically >4d46 dB to 6 MHz an d >4d46 dB to 6 MHz and 3.58 or 4.43 MHz ≥34 dB ≥34 dB 3.58 or 4.43 MHz ≥34 dB ≥34 dB >40 dB to 10 MHz. >40 dB to 10 MHz. (Chroma) (Chroma) Filters Filters Luminance <3 dB down at 1 MHz; ≥40 dB Luminance <3 dB down at 1 MHz; ≥40 dB down at 3.58 or 4.43 MHz. down at 3.58 or 4.43 MHz. Low Pass ≥14 dB down at 500 kHz. Typically –3 dB at 300 kHz. Low Pass ≥14 dB down at 500 kHz. Typically –3 dB at 300 kHz. Chrominance Chrominance 3.58 MHz ±1% of flat at 3.58 MHz. 3.58 MHz ±1% of flat at 3.58 MHz. –3 dB points: –3 dB points: Lower: 2.83 ±0.15 MHz. Lower: 2.83 ±0.15 MHz. Upper: 4.33 ±0.15 MHz. Upper: 4.33 ±0.15 MHz. 4.43 MHz ±1% of flat at 4.43 MHz. 4.43 MHz ±1% of flat at 4.43 MHz. –3 dB points: –3 dB points: Lower: 3.68 ±0.15 MHz. Lower: 3.68 ±0.15 MHz. Upper: 5.18 ±0.15 MHz. Upper: 5.18 ±0.15 MHz.

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 5–5 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 5–5 Specifications Specifications

Table 5–2: Waveform Monitor Vertical System (Cont.) Table 5–2: Waveform Monitor Vertical System (Cont.)

Performance Supplemental Performance Supplemental Characteristics Requirements Information Characteristics Requirements Information Diff Steps >40 dB at 3.58 MHz (4.43 MHz 5 step, 20 IRE staircase Diff Steps >40 dB at 3.58 MHz (4.43 MHz 5 step, 20 IRE staircase (Differentiated Steps PAL) within 2% of flat display. (Differentiated Steps PAL) within 2% of flat display. Attenuation) Vertical Gain increase Attenuation) Vertical Gain increase approximately 5X to approximately 5X to compare staircase risers. compare staircase risers. Linear Waveform Distortion Linear Waveform Distortion Pulse Preshoot, ≤1% of applied pulse amplitude. Typically: Pulse Preshoot, ≤1% of applied pulse amplitude. Typically: Overshoot, & Ringing <0.5% on T Pulse. Overshoot, & Ringing <0.5% on T Pulse. <1.0% on T/2 Pulse. <1.0% on T/2 Pulse. Pulse and Bar ≤1% of applied pulse amplitude. Typically: Pulse and Bar ≤1% of applied pulse amplitude. Typically: <0.5% on T Pulse. <0.5% on T Pulse. <1.0% on T/2 Pulse. <1.0% on T/2 Pulse. 25 ms Bar Tilt ≤1% of applied bar amplitude. 25 ms Bar Tilt ≤1% of applied bar amplitude. Field Square Wave Tilt ≤1% of applied square wave Typically <0.5%. Field Square Wave Tilt ≤1% of applied square wave Typically <0.5%. amplitude. amplitude. 2T Sin2 Pulse-to-Bar 1:1 ±1%. 2T Sin2 Pulse-to-Bar 1:1 ±1%. Ratio Ratio Non-Linear Waveform Distortion Non-Linear Waveform Distortion Differential Gain Differential Gain Aux Video Out ≤0.25% at 10% – 90% APL. Waveform Modes. Aux Video Out ≤0.25% at 10% – 90% APL. Waveform Modes. Pix Mon Out ≤0.25% at 10% – 90% APL. Pix Mon Out ≤0.25% at 10% – 90% APL. Differential Phase Differential Phase _ _ Aux Video Out ≤0.25 at 10% – 90% APL. Aux Video Out ≤0.25 at 10% – 90% APL. _ _ Pix Mon Out ≤0.25 at 10% – 90% APL. Pix Mon Out ≤0.25 at 10% – 90% APL.

5–6 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 5–6 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Specifications Specifications

Table 5–3: Waveform Monitor Probe Input Table 5–3: Waveform Monitor Probe Input

Performance Supplemental Performance Supplemental Characteristics Requirements Information Characteristics Requirements Information Input Resistance 1 MW. Input Resistance 1 MW. Input RC Product 20 ms (20 pF). Input RC Product 20 ms (20 pF). Gain Unity 3%. With gain adjusted for Gain Unity 3%. With gain adjusted for equivalent 1 V p-to-p dis- equivalent 1 V p-to-p dis- play. play. Frequency Response Frequency Response 25 Hz to 5 MHz ±2%. From 50 kHz Reference. 25 Hz to 5 MHz ±2%. From 50 kHz Reference. 5 MHz to 10 MHz +3% to –5%. 5 MHz to 10 MHz +3% to –5%. Tilt Less than 5% on 50 Hz square Fast DC restorer eliminates Tilt Less than 5% on 50 Hz square Fast DC restorer eliminates wave. low frequency tilt on a wave. low frequency tilt on a signal. composite video signal. Probe Calibrator Probe Calibrator Waveform 50% Duty Cycle square Waveform 50% Duty Cycle square wave. wave. Period 4 horizontal lines. Period 4 horizontal lines. Output Voltage 1.0 V ±0.5% (0.995 V to Output Voltage 1.0 V ±0.5% (0.995 V to 1.005 V). 1.005 V). Impedance Out ≈950 W. Impedance Out ≈950 W.

Table 5–4: Waveform Monitor Horizontal Deflection System Table 5–4: Waveform Monitor Horizontal Deflection System

Performance Supplemental Performance Supplemental Characteristics Requirements Information Characteristics Requirements Information Sweep Rates & Timing Accuracy over center 10 divi- Sweep Rates & Timing Accuracy over center 10 divi- Accuracy sions: Accuracy sions: 1 Line (5 ms/Div.) ±2%. 1 Line (5 ms/Div.) ±2%. 2 Line (10 ms/Div.) ±2%. 2 Line (10 ms/Div.) ±2%. 3 Line (15 ms/Div.) ±2%. 3 Line (15 ms/Div.) ±2%.

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 5–7 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 5–7 Specifications Specifications

Table 5–4: Waveform Monitor Horizontal Deflection System (Cont.) Table 5–4: Waveform Monitor Horizontal Deflection System (Cont.)

Performance Supplemental Performance Supplemental Characteristics Requirements Information Characteristics Requirements Information 1 Field Sweep Displays 1 full field includ- 1 Field Sweep Displays 1 full field includ- ing vertical interval. ing vertical interval. 2 Field Sweep Displays 2 full fields and the 2 Field Sweep Displays 2 full fields and the vertical interval between vertical interval between them. First sweep (left side them. First sweep (left side of CRT) is selectable be- of CRT) is selectable be- tween odd or even fields. tween odd or even fields. 3 Field Sweep Displays 3 full fields and the 3 Field Sweep Displays 3 full fields and the 2 vertical intervals between 2 vertical intervals between them. First sweep is select- them. First sweep is select- able between even or odd able between even or odd fields, and third field polarity fields, and third field polarity is the same as that of the is the same as that of the first field. first field. Sweep Linearity Sweep Linearity 1 Line (5 ms/Div.) ±1%. 1 Line (5 ms/Div.) ±1%. 2 Line (10 ms/Div.) ±1%. 2 Line (10 ms/Div.) ±1%. 3 Line (15 ms/Div.) ±1%. 3 Line (15 ms/Div.) ±1%. 1 Field Sweep ±0.5 Division. 1 Field Sweep ±0.5 Division. 2 Field Sweep ±0.5 Division. 2 Field Sweep ±0.5 Division. 3 Field Sweep ±0.5 Division. 3 Field Sweep ±0.5 Division. Slow Sweep ±5% of full screen over the Slow Sweep ±5% of full screen over the length of the sweep. length of the sweep.

5–8 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 5–8 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Specifications Specifications

Table 5–4: Waveform Monitor Horizontal Deflection System (Cont.) Table 5–4: Waveform Monitor Horizontal Deflection System (Cont.)

Performance Supplemental Performance Supplemental Characteristics Requirements Information Characteristics Requirements Information Magnified Sweep Accuracy Magnified Sweep Accuracy X5 (1 ms/Div.) ±1%. Applies to the center 10 X5 (1 ms/Div.) ±1%. Applies to the center 10 dsdivision sfs of un magni fedfied dsdivision sfs of un magni fedfied X10 (0.5 ms/Div.) ±2%. X10 (0.5 ms/Div.) ±2%. swee p. Exclu des th e fi rst 2 swee p. Exclu des th e fi rst 2 X20 (0.25 ms/Div.) ±3%. divisions of the magnified X20 (0.25 ms/Div.) ±3%. divisions of the magnified dsdisplay. dsdisplay. X25 (0.2 ms/Div.) ±3%. X25 (0.2 ms/Div.) ±3%. X50 (0.1 ms/Div.) ±3%. X50 (0.1 ms/Div.) ±3%. X100 (50 ns/Div.) ±5%. X100 (50 ns/Div.) ±5%. Magnified Sweep Linearity Magnified Sweep Linearity X5 (1 ms/Div.) ±1 minor division (≤2%). Applies to the center 10 X5 (1 ms/Div.) ±1 minor division (≤2%). Applies to the center 10 dsdivision sfs of un magni fedfied dsdivision sfs of un magni fedfied X10 (0.5 ms/Div.) ±1 minor division (≤2%). X10 (0.5 ms/Div.) ±1 minor division (≤2%). swee p. Exclu des th e fi rst 2 swee p. Exclu des th e fi rst 2 X20 (0.25 ms/Div.) ±1 minor division (≤2%). divisions of the magnified X20 (0.25 ms/Div.) ±1 minor division (≤2%). divisions of the magnified dsdisplay. dsdisplay. X25 (0.2 ms/Div.) ±1 minor division (≤2%). X25 (0.2 ms/Div.) ±1 minor division (≤2%). X50 (0.1 ms/Div.) ±1 minor division (≤2%). X50 (0.1 ms/Div.) ±1 minor division (≤2%). X100 (50 ns/Div.) ±1 minor division (≤2%). X100 (50 ns/Div.) ±1 minor division (≤2%). Variable Sweep Range >20%. Expands sweep around Variable Sweep Range >20%. Expands sweep around center of sweep. center of sweep. Slow Sweep Duration 4 to 12 seconds. Front- Slow Sweep Duration 4 to 12 seconds. Front- panel variable control. panel variable control. Timing Cursor Accuracy Within 5 ns, any delay within Timing Cursor Accuracy Within 5 ns, any delay within one line (64 ms). one line (64 ms). Line Select Line Select Range Full Field. Waveform monitor and Range Full Field. Waveform monitor and versemseeectorscope may select veersemseectorscope may select Field Selection 1 of 4 for NTSC or 1 of 8 for Field Selection 1 of 4 for NTSC or 1 of 8 for different lines. CRT alpha- different lines. CRT alpha- PAL. PAL. numeric identification. numeric identification. Even or Odd and All Fields. Even or Odd and All Fields.

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 5–9 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 5–9 Specifications Specifications

Table 5–4: Waveform Monitor Horizontal Deflection System (Cont.) Table 5–4: Waveform Monitor Horizontal Deflection System (Cont.)

Performance Supplemental Performance Supplemental Characteristics Requirements Information Characteristics Requirements Information RGB/YRGB RGB/YRGB Staircase Input A +10 V input will result in a Ground to +10 V. +10 V Staircase Input A +10 V input will result in a Ground to +10 V. +10 V Amplitude horizontal display of 9 divisions corresponds to left side of Amplitude horizontal display of 9 divisions corresponds to left side of ±1.4 major divisions. the CRT. ±1.4 major divisions. the CRT. Staircase Operating DC Signal levels plus peak AC, Staircase Operating DC Signal levels plus peak AC, Signal not to exceed –12 to +12 volts. Signal not to exceed –12 to +12 volts. Max AC signal volts 12 V peak-to-peak. Field or line rate sweeps. Max AC signal volts 12 V peak-to-peak. Field or line rate sweeps. Sweep Length Sweep Length RGB 2 Field = 27 – 33% of nor- RGB 2 Field = 27 – 33% of nor- mal. 1 Line = 27 – 33% of mal. 1 Line = 27 – 33% of normal. 2 Line = 27 – 33% normal. 2 Line = 27 – 33% of normal. of normal. YRGB 2 Field = 20 – 25% of nor- YRGB 2 Field = 20 – 25% of nor- mal. 1 Line = 20 – 25% of mal. 1 Line = 20 – 25% of normal. 2 Line = 20 – 25% normal. 2 Line = 20 – 25% of normal. of normal. Sweep Repetition Field or line rate of displayed Requires 1H or 1Fld sweep Sweep Repetition Field or line rate of displayed Requires 1H or 1Fld sweep Rate video or external sync signal as selection. Rate video or external sync signal as selection. selected by front-panel HOR- selected by front-panel HOR- IZONTAL controls. IZONTAL controls. External Horizontal Input Used for ICPM measure- External Horizontal Input Used for ICPM measure- ments. ments. Sensitivity Direct coupled 0 – 5 V. Sensitivity Direct coupled 0 – 5 V. Sawtooth input of up to 5 V Sawtooth input of up to 5 V is nominally a 10 division is nominally a 10 division horizontal sweep. horizontal sweep. Input Impedance ≈10 kW. Input Impedance ≈10 kW.

5–10 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 5–10 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Specifications Specifications

Table 5–5: Waveform Monitor DG and DP Display Table 5–5: Waveform Monitor DG and DP Display

Performance Supplemental Performance Supplemental Characteristics Requirements Information Characteristics Requirements Information Differential Gain Differential Gain Deflection Factor 5% dG deflects the trace 50 IRE Waveform gain X1, Var. Deflection Factor 5% dG deflects the trace 50 IRE Waveform gain X1, Var. (NTSC) or 500 mV (PAL) ±5%. gain off. Vector gain ad- (NTSC) or 500 mV (PAL) ±5%. gain off. Vector gain ad- justed to place chroma at justed to place chroma at compass rose. compass rose. Residual dG ≤0.2%, last 90% of trace. Residual dG ≤0.2%, last 90% of trace. (10 – 90% APL) (10 – 90% APL) Calibrated dG CRT readout. Calibrated dG CRT readout. Resolution 0.1%. Resolution 0.1%. Accuracy 0.1% ±10% of reading. Accuracy 0.1% ±10% of reading. Range ±5%. Range ±5%. Differential Phase Differential Phase _ _ Deflection Factor 5 dP deflects the trace 50 IRE Waveform gain X1, Var. Deflection Factor 5 dP deflects the trace 50 IRE Waveform gain X1, Var. (NTSC) or 500 mV (PAL) ±5%. gain off. Vector gain ad- (NTSC) or 500 mV (PAL) ±5%. gain off. Vector gain ad- justed to place chroma at justed to place chroma at compass rose. compass rose. _ _ Residual dP ≤0.1 , last 90% of trace. Residual dP ≤0.1 , last 90% of trace. (10 – 90% APL) (10 – 90% APL) Calibrated dP CRT readout. Calibrated dP CRT readout. _ _ Resolution 0.05 . Resolution 0.05 . _ _ _ _ Accuracy ±0.1 over any 10 increment. Accuracy ±0.1 over any 10 increment. _ _ _ _ ±0.1 over full 360 , Ext. Ref. ±0.1 over full 360 , Ext. Ref. _ _ ±0.2 burst lock. ±0.2 burst lock. _ _ Range 360 . Range 360 .

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 5–11 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 5–11 Specifications Specifications

Table 5–5: Waveform Monitor DG and DP Display (Cont.) Table 5–5: Waveform Monitor DG and DP Display (Cont.)

Performance Supplemental Performance Supplemental Characteristics Requirements Information Characteristics Requirements Information Recursive Filter Recursive Filter Noise Reduction ≈15 dB signal-to-noise Noise Reduction ≈15 dB signal-to-noise reduction with filter se- reduction with filter se- lected. Assumes white lected. Assumes white noise source. noise source. Cross-Luminance ≈30 dB with filter selected. Cross-Luminance ≈30 dB with filter selected. Rejection 0 dB in dual dP/dG mode. Rejection 0 dB in dual dP/dG mode. Unit Sample Settles to within 1 dB in Unit Sample Settles to within 1 dB in Response <50 lines with a step in Response <50 lines with a step in APL. Settles to within 1 dB APL. Settles to within 1 dB in <50 frames in line select. in <50 frames in line select. Chrominance 500 kHz ±100 kHz base- Chrominance 500 kHz ±100 kHz base- Bandwidth band. Bandwidth band.

5–12 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 5–12 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Specifications Specifications

Table 5–6: Synchronization Table 5–6: Synchronization

Performance Supplemental Performance Supplemental Characteristics Requirements Information Characteristics Requirements Information Sync Input Sync Input Internal Internal Ref. Sync 0.2 to 2.0 V peak-to-peak Composite video applied to Ref. Sync 0.2 to 2.0 V peak-to-peak Composite video applied to Separator composite video. Inputs A, B1, B2, or B3 or Separator composite video. Inputs A, B1, B2, or B3 or probe. probe. Int. Sync 0.5 to 2.0 V peak-to-peak Int. Sync 0.5 to 2.0 V peak-to-peak Separator composite video. Separator composite video. External External Black Burst –14 dB to +6 dB. Black Burst signal of 0.2 to Black Burst –14 dB to +6 dB. Black Burst signal of 0.2 to 5 times amplitude applied 5 times amplitude applied to EXT SYNC input. to EXT SYNC input. Composite Sync 0.2 to 8.0 V peak-to-peak. Composite sync applied to Composite Sync 0.2 to 8.0 V peak-to-peak. Composite sync applied to EXT SYNC input locks EXT SYNC input locks waveform monitor; vector- waveform monitor; vector- scope also requires CW scope also requires CW signal. signal. SCH Modes 286 mV (300 mV PAL) Sync Composite Video or Black SCH Modes 286 mV (300 mV PAL) Sync Composite Video or Black and Burst ±3 dB. Burst. and Burst ±3 dB. Burst. Direct Sync Direct Sync Horiz. Freq. Range 15.75 kHz ±1 kHz. Frequencies much below Horiz. Freq. Range 15.75 kHz ±1 kHz. Frequencies much below 15.75 kHz will not permit a 15.75 kHz will not permit a normal TV display. normal TV display. Sync Jitter Sync Jitter Comp sync or ≤12 ns with respect to input Comp sync or ≤12 ns with respect to input video sync. video sync. Variable APL ≤20 ns; with the addition of Variable APL ≤20 ns; with the addition of (10–90%) 36 dB white noise ≤90 ns. (10–90%) 36 dB white noise ≤90 ns. Noise Immunity <250 ns jitter, 1 V compos- Noise Immunity <250 ns jitter, 1 V compos- ite video with –26 dB white ite video with –26 dB white noise. noise.

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 5–13 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 5–13 Specifications Specifications

Table 5–6: Synchronization (Cont.) Table 5–6: Synchronization (Cont.)

Performance Supplemental Performance Supplemental Characteristics Requirements Information Characteristics Requirements Information AFC Sync AFC Sync Horiz. Freq. Range 15.75 kHz ±200 Hz. Horiz. Freq. Range 15.75 kHz ±200 Hz. Lock-In Time <1 second. Lock-In Time <1 second. Sync Jitter Sync Jitter Comp sync or ≤10 ns; with the addition of Comp sync or ≤10 ns; with the addition of video 36 dB white noise, ≤12 ns. video 36 dB white noise, ≤12 ns. Variable APL Variable APL (10–90%) (10–90%) Jitter with respect to ≤30 ns. Doubles with each 6 dB Jitter with respect to ≤30 ns. Doubles with each 6 dB white noise increase in white noise. white noise increase in white noise. Noise Immunity <90 ns jitter, 1 V composite Noise Immunity <90 ns jitter, 1 V composite video with –26 dB white video with –26 dB white noise. noise. Jitter from missing line <15 ns per missing sync Jitter from missing line <15 ns per missing sync sync pulses pulse. Maximum of 10 sync pulses pulse. Maximum of 10 consecutive line sync consecutive line sync pulses. pulses. Slow Sweep Triggering Slow Sweep Triggering Signal APL change from ≤10% – 90%. Front panel selectable for Signal APL change from ≤10% – 90%. Front panel selectable for either + or – level change. either + or – level change. Sensitivity 0.4 V to 2.0 V peak-to-peak Sensitivity 0.4 V to 2.0 V peak-to-peak composite video with APL composite video with APL change. change. Rate ≥0.2 Hz. Free runs at rates less than Rate ≥0.2 Hz. Free runs at rates less than 0.2 Hz or with no triggering 0.2 Hz or with no triggering signal. signal.

5–14 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 5–14 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Specifications Specifications

Table 5–6: Synchronization (Cont.) Table 5–6: Synchronization (Cont.)

Performance Supplemental Performance Supplemental Characteristics Requirements Information Characteristics Requirements Information Remote Sync Remote Sync Amplitude 2.0 to 5.0 V square wave, or Input enabled through Amplitude 2.0 to 5.0 V square wave, or Input enabled through 4.0 V composite sync. rear-panel REMOTE con- 4.0 V composite sync. rear-panel REMOTE con- nector. nector. Input Impedance 1 MW. Input Impedance 1 MW. Frequency 30/60 Hz (NTSC), 25/50 Hz Frequency 30/60 Hz (NTSC), 25/50 Hz (PAL) square wave will (PAL) square wave will synchronize a 2-field synchronize a 2-field sweep. Remote sync by- sweep. Remote sync by- passes the sync stripper passes the sync stripper and field ID circuits. and field ID circuits.

Table 5–7: Vectorscope Vector Display Table 5–7: Vectorscope Vector Display

Performance Supplemental Performance Supplemental Characteristics Requirements Information Characteristics Requirements Information Phase Control Phase Control Digital Phase Shifter Digital Phase Shifter _ _ Phase Accuracy ±0.1 . (External CW signal.) Phase Accuracy ±0.1 . (External CW signal.) _ _ 0.25 Burst Lock. 0.25 Burst Lock. _ _ Resolution 0.05 . Resolution 0.05 .

Chrominance Bandwidth FSCC (Subcarrier Frequency) Chrominance Bandwidth FSCC (Subcarrier Frequency)

Upper –3 dB Point FSC +500 kHz, ±100 kHz. NTSCNT C – 33.579545 79 4 MHz. Upper –3 dB Point FSC +500 kHz, ±100 kHz. NTSCNT C – 33.579545 79 4 MHz. Lower –3 dB Point FSC –500 kHz, ±100 kHz. PALA – 44.43361875 433 7 MHz. Lower –3 dB Point FSC –500 kHz, ±100 kHz. PALA – 44.43361875 433 7 MHz. Chrominance Transient Modulated Sin2 pulse in Chrominance Transient Modulated Sin2 pulse in Response R–Y Mode. Response R–Y Mode.

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 5–15 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 5–15 Specifications Specifications

Table 5–7: Vectorscope Vector Display (Cont.) Table 5–7: Vectorscope Vector Display (Cont.)

Performance Supplemental Performance Supplemental Characteristics Requirements Information Characteristics Requirements Information Display Display _ _ Vector Phase ±1.25 . Measured with color bar Vector Phase ±1.25 . Measured with color bar Accuracy signal. Accuracy signal. Vector Gain Accuracy ±2.5% (1.25 IRE). Vector Gain Accuracy ±2.5% (1.25 IRE). _ _ Quadrature Phasing ±0.5 . Quadrature Phasing ±0.5 . Subcarrier Regenerator Subcarrier Regenerator Pull-In Range PAL instruments are tested Pull-In Range PAL instruments are tested to 10 Hz, but typically lock to 10 Hz, but typically lock (NTSC) ±50 Hz of F . (NTSC) ±50 Hz of F . SC to within 50 Hz. SC to within 50 Hz. (PAL) ±10 Hz of FSC. (PAL) ±10 Hz of FSC. Pull-In Time Within 1 second, with sub- Pull-In Time Within 1 second, with sub- carrier frequency within carrier frequency within 50 Hz (10 Hz for PAL 50 Hz (10 Hz for PAL instruments) of FSC. instruments) of FSC. Phase Shift with Phase Shift with Subcarrier Frequency Subcarrier Frequency Change Change _ _ (NTSC) ±0.5 from FSC to (FSC (NTSC) ±0.5 from FSC to (FSC +50 Hz), or FSC to (FSC +50 Hz), or FSC to (FSC –50 Hz). –50 Hz). _ _ (PAL) ±0.5 from FSC to (FSC + (PAL) ±0.5 from FSC to (FSC + 10 Hz), or FSC to (FSC 10 Hz), or FSC to (FSC –10 Hz). –10 Hz). _ _ Phase Shift with Burst ±2 from nominal burst ampli- Internal or External burst Phase Shift with Burst ±2 from nominal burst ampli- Internal or External burst Amplitude Change tude to ±3 dB. reference. Amplitude Change tude to ±3 dB. reference. _ _ Phase Shift with Input ±2 . With EXT REF selected: Phase Shift with Input ±2 . With EXT REF selected: Channel Change Channel A to CH B; Channel Change Channel A to CH B; Channels B1, B2, B3 to Channels B1, B2, B3 to one another one another _ _ Phase Control Range 360 continuous rotation. Phase Control Range 360 continuous rotation.

5–16 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 5–16 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Specifications Specifications

Table 5–7: Vectorscope Vector Display (Cont.) Table 5–7: Vectorscope Vector Display (Cont.)

Performance Supplemental Performance Supplemental Characteristics Requirements Information Characteristics Requirements Information Vector Display Vector Display _ _ Differential Phase ≤1 . Differential Phase ≤1 . Differential Gain ≤1%. Differential Gain ≤1%. Measured with 140 IRE Measured with 140 IRE (1 V) linearity signal with 40 (1 V) linearity signal with 40 IRE (300 mV) of subcarrier. IRE (300 mV) of subcarrier. Position Control Range Position Control Range I I Horizontal ≥1/4 (6 mm) from center. Horizontal ≥1/4 (6 mm) from center. I I Vertical ≥1/4 (6 mm) from center. Vertical ≥1/4 (6 mm) from center. I I Clamp Stability 1/64 (0.4 mm) or less. Center Spot movement Clamp Stability 1/64 (0.4 mm) or less. Center Spot movement with Rotation of PHASE with Rotation of PHASE control. control. Variable GAIN Range +14 dB to –6 dB of 75% color Unterminated color bar Variable GAIN Range +14 dB to –6 dB of 75% color Unterminated color bar bar preset gain. signal can be brought to bar preset gain. signal can be brought to appropriate targets. Burst appropriate targets. Burst from a triple-terminated from a triple-terminated signal can be moved to the signal can be moved to the compass rose. compass rose. Max Gain >X5. Max Gain >X5. _ _ Variable GAIN Phase ±1 as gain is varied from Variable GAIN Phase ±1 as gain is varied from Shift +3 dB to –6 dB. Shift +3 dB to –6 dB.

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 5–17 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 5–17 Specifications Specifications

Table 5–8: Vectorscope XY Display Table 5–8: Vectorscope XY Display

Performance Supplemental Performance Supplemental Characteristics Requirements Information Characteristics Requirements Information Input DC coupled differential Input DC coupled differential inputs through rear-panel inputs through rear-panel connector. connector. Input Amplitude 2 to 9 V peak-to-peak. Adjustable full scale deflec- Input Amplitude 2 to 9 V peak-to-peak. Adjustable full scale deflec- tion 0 dBm to +12 dBm for tion 0 dBm to +12 dBm for 600 W system. Factory set 600 W system. Factory set to 0 dBm. to 0 dBm. Maximum Input Voltage 15 V combined peak signal and Maximum Input Voltage 15 V combined peak signal and DC. DC. Frequency Response DC to >500 kHz. 3 dB point. Frequency Response DC to >500 kHz. 3 dB point. X and Y Input Phase < a trace width of separation at Single-ended. Phase X and Y Input Phase < a trace width of separation at Single-ended. Phase Matching 20 kHz. matching above 20 kHz Matching 20 kHz. matching above 20 kHz may be improved by adjust- may be improved by adjust- ing Vertical Deflection ing Vertical Deflection Amplifier VHF Compensa- Amplifier VHF Compensa- tion. tion.

Table 5–9: Vectorscope SCH Phase Display Table 5–9: Vectorscope SCH Phase Display

Performance Supplemental Performance Supplemental Characteristics Requirements Information Characteristics Requirements Information Accuracy Accuracy _ _ _ _ Absolute ±5 phase at 25 C. Absolute ±5 phase at 25 C. _ _ Relative ±2 . Relative ±2 . _ _ _ _ Temperature Stability ±0.1 phase/ C. Temperature Stability ±0.1 phase/ C. Acquisition Time ≤1 sec. Acquisition Time ≤1 sec. _ _ Display Phase Error ±1.25 calibrated for zero Display Phase Error ±1.25 calibrated for zero Caused by CRT Geome- display phase error at zero Caused by CRT Geome- display phase error at zero try Variations SCH phase. try Variations SCH phase.

5–18 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 5–18 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Specifications Specifications

Table 5–9: Vectorscope SCH Phase Display (Cont.) Table 5–9: Vectorscope SCH Phase Display (Cont.)

Performance Supplemental Performance Supplemental Characteristics Requirements Information Characteristics Requirements Information Input Timing Stable display with any time Input Timing Stable display with any time relationship between sig- relationship between sig- nals on CH A, CH B, and nals on CH A, CH B, and EXT. EXT. Display Range Display Range _ _ Ext Reference 360 . Ext Reference 360 . _ _ _ _ Int Reference ±70 . Typically >80 . Int Reference ±70 . Typically >80 .

Table 5–10: CRTs and High Voltage Supplies Table 5–10: CRTs and High Voltage Supplies

Performance Supplemental Performance Supplemental Characteristics Requirements Information Characteristics Requirements Information Waveform Monitor Waveform Monitor Viewing Area 80 × 100 mm. Horizontal Viewing Area 80 × 100 mm. Horizontal Scale 12.5 Divisions. Verti- Scale 12.5 Divisions. Verti- cal Scale 170 IRE (NTSC), cal Scale 170 IRE (NTSC), 1.19 volts (PAL). 1.19 volts (PAL). Accelerating Potential Nominally 20 kV. Accelerating Potential Nominally 20 kV. _ _ Orthogonality ±1 . Orthogonality ±1 . _ _ Trace Rotation Range ≥±1 from horizontal. Typical adjustment range is Trace Rotation Range ≥±1 from horizontal. Typical adjustment range is _ _ ≈8 . ≈8 . Vectorscope Vectorscope Viewing Area 80 × 100 mm. Viewing Area 80 × 100 mm. Accelerating Potential Nominally 13.75 kV. Accelerating Potential Nominally 13.75 kV. _ _ Orthogonality ±1 . Orthogonality ±1 .

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 5–19 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 5–19 Specifications Specifications

Table 5–11: Power Requirements Table 5–11: Power Requirements

Performance Supplemental Performance Supplemental Characteristics Requirements Information Characteristics Requirements Information Mains Voltage Ranges Mains Voltage Ranges 110 VAC 90 – 132 V. Selected by rear-panel 110 VAC 90 – 132 V. Selected by rear-panel switch. switch. 220 VAC 200 – 250 V. 220 VAC 200 – 250 V. Mains Frequency Range 48 – 66 Hz. Mains Frequency Range 48 – 66 Hz. Crest Factor ≥1.3. Crest Factor ≥1.3. Power Consumption 120 Watts maximum. Power Consumption 120 Watts maximum.

Table 5–12: Physical Characteristics Table 5–12: Physical Characteristics

Characteristics Supplemental Information Characteristics Supplemental Information Dimensions Dimensions Height 5 1/4 inches (133.4 mm). Height 5 1/4 inches (133.4 mm). Width 19 inches (483 mm). Width 19 inches (483 mm). Length 18 inches (460 mm). Length 18 inches (460 mm). Net Weight Approximately 28 lbs (approximately 12.7 kg). Net Weight Approximately 28 lbs (approximately 12.7 kg). Shipping Weight Approximately 45 lbs (approximately 20.1 kg). Shipping Weight Approximately 45 lbs (approximately 20.1 kg).

5–20 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 5–20 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Specifications Specifications

Table 5–13: Environmental Summary Table 5–13: Environmental Summary

Characteristics Supplemental Information Characteristics Supplemental Information Temperature Temperature _ _ _ _ Operating 0 C to +50 C. Operating 0 C to +50 C. _ _ _ _ Non-Operating –55 C to +75 C. Non-Operating –55 C to +75 C. Altitude Altitude Operating To 2 km maximum. Operating To 2 km maximum. Vibration Vibration Operating 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) peak-to-peak 10 –55 Hz, 75 minutes total. Operating 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) peak-to-peak 10 –55 Hz, 75 minutes total. Shock Shock Non-Operating 30 g acceleration 3 times each major axis. 11 ms halfsine. Non-Operating 30 g acceleration 3 times each major axis. 11 ms halfsine. Bench Handling 4 inch drop to table top on each of the four bottom corners. Bench Handling 4 inch drop to table top on each of the four bottom corners. Transportation Transportation Vibration Qualified under National Safe Transit Association (NSTA) Test Vibration Qualified under National Safe Transit Association (NSTA) Test Procedure 1A–B–1. Procedure 1A–B–1. Drop Test Qualified under NSTA Test Procedure 1A–B–2. Drop Test Qualified under NSTA Test Procedure 1A–B–2. Humidity 90 to 95% Noncondensing. Humidity 90 to 95% Noncondensing. Equipment Type Test and measurement Equipment Type Test and measurement Safety Class Class I (as defined in IEC 1010–1, Annex H) – grounded Safety Class Class I (as defined in IEC 1010–1, Annex H) – grounded product product Overvoltage Category Overvoltage Category II (as defined in IEC 1010–1, Annex J). Overvoltage Category Overvoltage Category II (as defined in IEC 1010–1, Annex J). Pollution Degree Pollution Degree 2 (as defined in IEC 1010–1). Pollution Degree Pollution Degree 2 (as defined in IEC 1010–1). Note: rated for indoor use only. Note: rated for indoor use only.

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 5–21 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 5–21 Specifications Specifications

Table 5–14: Certifications and compliances Table 5–14: Certifications and compliances

EC Declaration of Meets intent of Directive 89/336/EEC for Electromagnetic EC Declaration of Meets intent of Directive 89/336/EEC for Electromagnetic Conformity – EMC 1 Compatibility. Compliance was demonstrated to the following Conformity – EMC 1 Compatibility. Compliance was demonstrated to the following specifications as listed in the Official Journal of the European specifications as listed in the Official Journal of the European Communities: Communities: EN 50081-1 Emissions: EN 50081-1 Emissions: EN 55022 Class B Radiated and Conducted Emissions EN 55022 Class B Radiated and Conducted Emissions EN 50082-1 Immunity: EN 50082-1 Immunity: IEC 801-2Electrostatic Discharge Immunity IEC 801-2Electrostatic Discharge Immunity IEC 801-3RF Electromagnetic Field Immunity IEC 801-3RF Electromagnetic Field Immunity IEC 801-4Electrical Fast Transient/Burst Immunity IEC 801-4Electrical Fast Transient/Burst Immunity 1 High-quality shielded cables must be used to ensure 1 High-quality shielded cables must be used to ensure compliance to the above listed standards. compliance to the above listed standards. This product complies when installed into any of the This product complies when installed into any of the following Tektronix instrument enclosures: following Tektronix instrument enclosures: 1700F00 Standard Cabinet 1700F00 Standard Cabinet 1700F02 Portable Cabinet 1700F02 Portable Cabinet 1700F05 Rack Adapter 1700F05 Rack Adapter FCC Compliance Emissions comply with FCC Code of Federal Regulations 47, Part FCC Compliance Emissions comply with FCC Code of Federal Regulations 47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class A Limits 15, Subpart B, Class A Limits Installation Terminals on this product may have different installation Installation Terminals on this product may have different installation (Overvoltage) (overvoltage) category designations. The installation categories (Overvoltage) (overvoltage) category designations. The installation categories Category are: Category are: CAT III Distribution-level mains (usually permanently CAT III Distribution-level mains (usually permanently connected). Equipment at this level is typically in a fixed connected). Equipment at this level is typically in a fixed industrial location. industrial location. CAT II Local-level mains (wall sockets). Equipment at this level CAT II Local-level mains (wall sockets). Equipment at this level includes appliances, portable tools, and similar includes appliances, portable tools, and similar products. Equipment is usually cord-connected. products. Equipment is usually cord-connected. CAT I Secondary (signal level) or battery operated circuits of CAT I Secondary (signal level) or battery operated circuits of electronic equipment. electronic equipment. Pollution Degree A measure of the contaminates that could occur in the environment Pollution Degree A measure of the contaminates that could occur in the environment around and within a product. Typically the internal environment around and within a product. Typically the internal environment inside a product is considered to be the same as the external. inside a product is considered to be the same as the external. Products should be used only in the environment for which they Products should be used only in the environment for which they are rated. are rated.

5–22 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 5–22 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Specifications Specifications

Table 5–14: Certifications and compliances (Cont.) Table 5–14: Certifications and compliances (Cont.)

Pollution Degree 1 Pollution Degree 1 No pollution or only dry, nonconductive pollution occurs. No pollution or only dry, nonconductive pollution occurs. Products in this category are generally encapsulated, Products in this category are generally encapsulated, hermetically sealed, or located in clean rooms. hermetically sealed, or located in clean rooms. Pollution Degree 2 Pollution Degree 2 Normally only dry, nonconductive pollution occurs. Normally only dry, nonconductive pollution occurs. Occasionally a temporary conductivity that is caused by Occasionally a temporary conductivity that is caused by condensation must be expected. This location is a typical condensation must be expected. This location is a typical office/home environment. Temporary condensation occurs office/home environment. Temporary condensation occurs only when the product is out of service. only when the product is out of service. Pollution Degree 3 Pollution Degree 3 Conductive pollution, or dry, nonconductive pollution that Conductive pollution, or dry, nonconductive pollution that becomes conductive due to condensation. These are becomes conductive due to condensation. These are sheltered locations where neither temperature nor humidity is sheltered locations where neither temperature nor humidity is controlled. The area is protected from direct sunshine, rain, or controlled. The area is protected from direct sunshine, rain, or direct wind. direct wind. Pollution Degree 4 Pollution Degree 4 Pollution that generates persistent conductivity through Pollution that generates persistent conductivity through conductive dust, rain, or snow. Typical outdoor locations. conductive dust, rain, or snow. Typical outdoor locations. Safety Standards Safety Standards U.S.Nationally UL1244 U.S.Nationally UL1244 RecognizedTesting Standard for electrical and electronic measuring and test RecognizedTesting Standard for electrical and electronic measuring and test Laboratory Listing equipment. Laboratory Listing equipment. Canadian Certification CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 231 Canadian Certification CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 231 CSA safety requirements for electrical and electronic CSA safety requirements for electrical and electronic measuring and test equipment. measuring and test equipment. European Union Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC, amended by 93/69/EEC European Union Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC, amended by 93/69/EEC Compliance EN 61010-1 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for Compliance EN 61010-1 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control, and laboratory use. measurement, control, and laboratory use. Additional IEC61010-1 Additional IEC61010-1 Compliance Safety requirements for electrical equipment for Compliance Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control, and laboratory use. measurement, control, and laboratory use. Safety Certification Compliance Safety Certification Compliance _ _ Temperature, +5 to +40 C Temperature, +5 to +40 C operating operating

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 5–23 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 5–23 Specifications Specifications

Table 5–14: Certifications and compliances (Cont.) Table 5–14: Certifications and compliances (Cont.)

Altitude (maximum 2000 meters Altitude (maximum 2000 meters operating) operating) Equipment Type Test and measuring Equipment Type Test and measuring Safety Class Class 1 (as defined in IEC 1010-1, Annex H) – grounded product Safety Class Class 1 (as defined in IEC 1010-1, Annex H) – grounded product Overvoltage Category Overvoltage Category II (as defined in IEC 1010-1, Annex J) Overvoltage Category Overvoltage Category II (as defined in IEC 1010-1, Annex J) Pollution Degree Pollution Degree 2 (as defined in IEC 1010-1). Note: Rated for Pollution Degree Pollution Degree 2 (as defined in IEC 1010-1). Note: Rated for indoor use only. indoor use only.

5–24 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 5–24 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Options and Accessories Options and Accessories

Options and Accessories Options and Accessories

Options Options The Power Cord options are the only currently available options for The Power Cord options are the only currently available options for purchase with the 1780R-Series. Part numbers are listed below. purchase with the 1780R-Series. Part numbers are listed below.

Accessories Accessories Standard Accessories Standard Accessories The following accessories are shipped with the 1780R-Series. The following accessories are shipped with the 1780R-Series.

Qty Tek Part Number Description Qty Tek Part Number Description 1 070–6890–XX 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 1 070–6890–XX 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 3 150–1136–00 Graticule Lamp, Incandescent 3 150–1136–00 Graticule Lamp, Incandescent 1 159–0023–00 Replacement Cartridge Fuse, 2 A Slow, 250V 1 159–0023–00 Replacement Cartridge Fuse, 2 A Slow, 250V 1 331–0519–00 Graticule, 511–1979, Visual 102 1 331–0519–00 Graticule, 511–1979, Visual 102 (1780R ONLY) (1780R ONLY) 1 331–0520–00 Graticule, 511–1979, Photographic 1 331–0520–00 Graticule, 511–1979, Photographic (1780R ONLY) (1780R ONLY) 1 331–0523–00 Graticule, K–Factor, Visual 1 331–0523–00 Graticule, K–Factor, Visual (1781R ONLY) (1781R ONLY) 1 331–0524–00 Graticule, K–Factor, Photographic 1 331–0524–00 Graticule, K–Factor, Photographic (1781R ONLY) (1781R ONLY) 1 378–0337–00 Filter, Air 1 378–0337–00 Filter, Air 1 390–1039–00 Cabinet, Wraparound 1 390–1039–00 Cabinet, Wraparound

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 6–1 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 6–1 Options and Accessories Options and Accessories

One of the following cables is shipped with each instrument: One of the following cables is shipped with each instrument:

Qty Tek Part Number Description Qty Tek Part Number Description 1 161–0216–00 Cable, Power 1 161–0216–00 Cable, Power 1 161–0066–09 Cable, Power (Option A1, 220 V Euro) 1 161–0066–09 Cable, Power (Option A1, 220 V Euro) 1 161–0066–10 Cable, Power (Option A2, 240 V, UK) 1 161–0066–10 Cable, Power (Option A2, 240 V, UK) 1 161–0066–11 Cable, Power (Option A3, 240 V, Aust) 1 161–0066–11 Cable, Power (Option A3, 240 V, Aust)

Optional Accessories Optional Accessories The following is a list of the most common accessory items for the The following is a list of the most common accessory items for the 1780R-Series. 1780R-Series.

Description Tek Part Number Description Tek Part Number 1780R-Series Service Manual 070–8030–XX 1780R-Series Service Manual 070–8030–XX Extender Kit for Oscillator & Z–Axis Circuit Boards 016–1011–00 Extender Kit for Oscillator & Z–Axis Circuit Boards 016–1011–00 Viewing Hood 016–0475–00 Viewing Hood 016–0475–00 Portable Cabinet 1780F02 Portable Cabinet 1780F02 Rack-Mount Shelf 1780F05 Rack-Mount Shelf 1780F05

6–2 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual 6–2 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Index Index

Index Index A C A C Absolute units (mV / IRE), 3–54 Cabinet, portable (optional acces- Absolute units (mV / IRE), 3–54 Cabinet, portable (optional acces- Accessories, 6–1 sory), 6–2 Accessories, 6–1 sory), 6–2 Adjustments CAL OUT, probe, 2–9 Adjustments CAL OUT, probe, 2–9 Calibrator amplitude (zero set), Calibrate menu, 2–8, 3–42 Calibrator amplitude (zero set), Calibrate menu, 2–8, 3–42 3–45 Password access, 3–43, 3–46, 3–45 Password access, 3–43, 3–46, External horizontal gain 3–49 External horizontal gain 3–49 (waveform), 3–46 Selecting vectorscope / waveform (waveform), 3–46 Selecting vectorscope / waveform Gain (vector), 3–46, 3–49 calibration, 3–42 Gain (vector), 3–46, 3–49 calibration, 3–42 Horizontal gain (waveform), Vectorscope calibration proce- Horizontal gain (waveform), Vectorscope calibration proce- 3–45 dure, 3–46 3–45 dure, 3–46 Horizontal position control cal- Waveform calibration procedure, Horizontal position control cal- Waveform calibration procedure, ibration, 3–43 3–43 ibration, 3–43 3–43 Readout intensity (vector), 3–46, Calibrator amplitude Readout intensity (vector), 3–46, Calibrator amplitude 3–51 Fixed, 3–30, 3–53 3–51 Fixed, 3–30, 3–53 Readout intensity (waveform), Variable, 3–29 Readout intensity (waveform), Variable, 3–29 3–43 Zero set, 3–45 3–43 Zero set, 3–45 Scale illumination, 2–3, 3–6 Calibrator signal, vector (on / off), Scale illumination, 2–3, 3–6 Calibrator signal, vector (on / off), Trace rotation (waveform), 3–43 3–46, 3–51 Trace rotation (waveform), 3–43 3–46, 3–51 Vertical gain (waveform), 3–45 Calibrator signal, waveform (on / Vertical gain (waveform), 3–45 Calibrator signal, waveform (on / Voltage cursors (zero set), 3–45 off), 3–42 Voltage cursors (zero set), 3–45 off), 3–42 Air filter (fan), 6–1 Chroma–to–Luma inequalities, Air filter (fan), 6–1 Chroma–to–Luma inequalities, Audio feedback, 2–2 4–23 Audio feedback, 2–2 4–23 Audio input (XY INPUT) connec- Lissajous display, 3–9, 4–27 Audio input (XY INPUT) connec- Lissajous display, 3–9, 4–27 tor, 3–10 Chrominance filter, 2–14 tor, 3–10 Chrominance filter, 2–14 AUX filter, 2–14 Clamp (sync tip / back porch), AUX filter, 2–14 Clamp (sync tip / back porch), AUX IN connector, 2–16 3–53 AUX IN connector, 2–16 3–53 AUX OUT connector, 2–16 Color bar amplitude (75% / 100%), AUX OUT connector, 2–16 Color bar amplitude (75% / 100%), Auxiliary input, 2–14, 2–16 3–54 Auxiliary input, 2–14, 2–16 3–54 Color framing, 3–22 Color framing, 3–22 Communication, serial remote Communication, serial remote B (RS232D, RS422A), 3–18 B (RS232D, RS422A), 3–18 Companion switches, 2–1, 2–9 Companion switches, 2–1, 2–9 Baud rates, 3–20, 3–55 Baud rates, 3–20, 3–55 Configure menu, 2–8, 3–52 Configure menu, 2–8, 3–52 Beep, 2–2, 3–55, 3–57 Beep, 2–2, 3–55, 3–57 Toggling between pages, 3–52 Toggling between pages, 3–52 Bowtie measurement, 4–33 Bowtie measurement, 4–33

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Index–1 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Index–1 Index Index

Coupling (AC / DC / GND), 3–53 F Coupling (AC / DC / GND), 3–53 F CRT controls, 2–1, 2–3 CRT controls, 2–1, 2–3 Cursors FSC time marks measurement, 4–36 Cursors FSC time marks measurement, 4–36 Time, 2–5, 3–1 Fan filter (standard accessory), 6–1 Time, 2–5, 3–1 Fan filter (standard accessory), 6–1 Set interval, 3–45 Field trigger (F1 / F2), 3–53 Set interval, 3–45 Field trigger (F1 / F2), 3–53 Voltage, 2–6, 3–2 Filter, 2–14 Voltage, 2–6, 3–2 Filter, 2–14 Units (mV / IRE), 3–54 Air, 6–1 Units (mV / IRE), 3–54 Air, 6–1 Zero set, 3–45 AUX, 2–14 Zero set, 3–45 AUX, 2–14 CW connector, 2–16 Chrominance, 2–14 CW connector, 2–16 Chrominance, 2–14 CW reference, 2–12, 3–55 Differentiated step, 2–14 CW reference, 2–12, 3–55 Differentiated step, 2–14 Flat, 2–14 Flat, 2–14 Low–pass, 2–14 Low–pass, 2–14 D Luminance, 2–14 D Luminance, 2–14 Flat filter, 2–14 Flat filter, 2–14 DC level measurements, 3–24 DC level measurements, 3–24 Focus control, 2–3 Focus control, 2–3 DC restorer (slow / fast / off), 3–53 DC restorer (slow / fast / off), 3–53 Front panel controls, 2–3 Front panel controls, 2–3 Dead zone, 3–43 Dead zone, 3–43 Knob assignment timeout (ON / Knob assignment timeout (ON / Differential gain measurement, Differential gain measurement, OFF), 3–55 OFF), 3–55 3–9, 4–7 3–9, 4–7 Fuse, replacement, 6–1 Fuse, replacement, 6–1 Differential phase and gain mea- Differential phase and gain mea- surement, 4–12 surement, 4–12 Differential phase measurement, G Differential phase measurement, G 3–9, 4–2 3–9, 4–2 Differentiated step filter, 2–14 Gain Differentiated step filter, 2–14 Gain Disable the beep, 2–2 External horizontal (waveform), Disable the beep, 2–2 External horizontal (waveform), Disable the password, 3–34 3–42 Disable the password, 3–34 3–42 Horizontal (waveform), 3–45 Horizontal (waveform), 3–45 Vector, 3–46 Vector, 3–46 E Vertical (waveform), 3–45 E Vertical (waveform), 3–45 Gain control (vector), 2–14 Gain control (vector), 2–14 Enable the password, 3–34 Enable the password, 3–34 Gain control (waveform), 2–14 Gain control (waveform), 2–14 Extender board kit for Oscillator Extender board kit for Oscillator Ghost–cancelling, 3–3 Ghost–cancelling, 3–3 and Z–Axis circuit boards, 6–2 and Z–Axis circuit boards, 6–2 Graticules, 3–6 Graticules, 3–6 External horizontal External horizontal Diff gain and diff phase graticule Diff gain and diff phase graticule Connector, 2–18 Connector, 2–18 scales, 3–9 scales, 3–9 Gain, 3–45 Gain, 3–45 Part numbers, 6–1 Part numbers, 6–1 Input, 3–42 Input, 3–42 Replacement lamps, 6–1 Replacement lamps, 6–1 External reference, 2–12, 2–16, External reference, 2–12, 2–16, Vector Vector 3–55 3–55

Index–2 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Index–2 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Index Index

NTSC, 3–6 Store a new preset, 3–15, 3–39 NTSC, 3–6 Store a new preset, 3–15, 3–39 PAL, 3–7 Use the password, 3–35 PAL, 3–7 Use the password, 3–35 Waveform Zero set voltage cursors, 3–45 Waveform Zero set voltage cursors, 3–45 NTSC, 3–12 NTSC, 3–12 PAL, 3–12 PAL, 3–12 XY graticule scale, 3–9 I XY graticule scale, 3–9 I Incidental Carrier Phase Modula- Incidental Carrier Phase Modula- H tion (ICPM), 4–17 H tion (ICPM), 4–17 System (B/G or I), 3–53 System (B/G or I), 3–53 Hold for function switches, 2–1 Zero carrier, 4–18 Hold for function switches, 2–1 Zero carrier, 4–18 Horizontal gain adjustment Incorrect password, 3–35 Horizontal gain adjustment Incorrect password, 3–35 (waveform), 3–45 Input channel connectors, 2–16 (waveform), 3–45 Input channel connectors, 2–16 Horizontal position control, 2–5 Input channel switches, 2–15 Horizontal position control, 2–5 Input channel switches, 2–15 Horizontal position control calibra- Inputs (AC /DC coupled), 3–53 Horizontal position control calibra- Inputs (AC /DC coupled), 3–53 tion, 3–43 Intensity control, 2–3 tion, 3–43 Intensity control, 2–3 How to... Internal reference, 2–12, 3–55 How to... Internal reference, 2–12, 3–55 Adjust calibrator amplitude (zero Adjust calibrator amplitude (zero set), 3–45 set), 3–45 Adjust external horizontal gain K Adjust external horizontal gain K (waveform), 3–45 (waveform), 3–45 K Factor measurement, 4–20 K Factor measurement, 4–20 Adjust horizontal gain Adjust horizontal gain (waveform), 3–45 (waveform), 3–45 Adjust readout intensity (vector), L Adjust readout intensity (vector), L 3–46 3–46 Adjust readout intensity Large knob (precision measure- Adjust readout intensity Large knob (precision measure- (waveform), 3–43 ment control), 2–5, 2–7, 3–6 (waveform), 3–43 ment control), 2–5, 2–7, 3–6 Adjust scale illumination, 3–6 Associated switches Adjust scale illumination, 3–6 Associated switches Adjust trace rotation (vector), buttons, 2–5, 2–7, 3–6 Adjust trace rotation (vector), buttons, 2–5, 2–7, 3–6 3–46 Line select, 3–3 3–46 Line select, 3–3 Adjust trace rotation (waveform), Phase shift, 2–7, 3–5 Adjust trace rotation (waveform), Phase shift, 2–7, 3–5 3–43 Reference set, 2–7, 3–1, 3–5 3–43 Reference set, 2–7, 3–1, 3–5 Calibrate the horizontal position Time cursors, 2–5, 3–1, 3–45 Calibrate the horizontal position Time cursors, 2–5, 3–1, 3–45 control, 3–43 Voltage cursors, 2–6, 3–2, control, 3–43 Voltage cursors, 2–6, 3–2, Change the password, 3–35 3–45, 3–54 Change the password, 3–35 3–45, 3–54 Enable /disable the password, LINE / FIELD switch, 2–12 Enable /disable the password, LINE / FIELD switch, 2–12 3–34 Line select, 3–3 3–34 Line select, 3–3 Enter / exit a menu, 4–1 In diff gain, 4–10 Enter / exit a menu, 4–1 In diff gain, 4–10 Recall initial settings, 3–37 In diff phase, 4–6 Recall initial settings, 3–37 In diff phase, 4–6 Recall preset settings, 3–36 Timing cursors in, 2–5 Recall preset settings, 3–36 Timing cursors in, 2–5 Recover a saved instrument Line–select, 2–6 Recover a saved instrument Line–select, 2–6 configuration, 3–37 Line–time distortion, 3–13 configuration, 3–37 Line–time distortion, 3–13

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Index–3 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Index–3 Index Index

Low–pass filter, 2–14 O Low–pass filter, 2–14 O Luminance filter, 2–14 Luminance filter, 2–14 OFF < switch, 2–13 OFF < switch, 2–13 Offsets (overlay mode), 3–26 Offsets (overlay mode), 3–26 M Offsets (parade mode), 3–23 M Offsets (parade mode), 3–23 ON > switch, 2–12 ON > switch, 2–12 Magnifier, 2–12 Magnifier, 2–12 ONE / TWO / THREE switch, ONE / TWO / THREE switch, Measurement menu Measurement menu 2–12 2–12 Bowtie, 4–33 Bowtie, 4–33 Options, 6–1 Options, 6–1 Chrominance–to–luminance Chrominance–to–luminance Oscillator, 3–46, 3–51 Oscillator, 3–46, 3–51 inequalities, 4–23 inequalities, 4–23 Overlaid, 4–18 Overlaid, 4–18 Diff phase and diff gain, 4–12 Diff phase and diff gain, 4–12 Overlay mode, 2–11, 3–26 Overlay mode, 2–11, 3–26 Differential gain, 4–7 Differential gain, 4–7 Differential phase, 4–2 Differential phase, 4–2 FSC time marks, 4–36 P FSC time marks, 4–36 P General measurement informa- General measurement informa- tion, 2–8, 3–56, 4–1 Parade mode, 2–11, 3–23 tion, 2–8, 3–56, 4–1 Parade mode, 2–11, 3–23 Incidental Carrier Phase Modula- PARADE/OVERLAY switch, 2–11 Incidental Carrier Phase Modula- PARADE/OVERLAY switch, 2–11 tion (ICPM), 2–7, 3–5, 4–17 Password, 3–34 tion (ICPM), 2–7, 3–5, 4–17 Password, 3–34 K Factor, 4–20 Change, 3–35 K Factor, 4–20 Change, 3–35 Noise, 4–16 Define, 3–34 Noise, 4–16 Define, 3–34 R–Y sweep, 4–31 Enable / disable, 3–34 R–Y sweep, 4–31 Enable / disable, 3–34 Short–Time Distortion, 4–28 Incorrect, 3–35 Short–Time Distortion, 4–28 Incorrect, 3–35 Menu access, 2–8, 3–32 Phase display (180 / 360), 3–54 Menu access, 2–8, 3–32 Phase display (180 / 360), 3–54 Menus Phase shift, 2–5, 3–5 Menus Phase shift, 2–5, 3–5 Calibrate, 2–8, 3–42 Picture monitor output Calibrate, 2–8, 3–42 Picture monitor output Configure, 2–8, 3–52 Bright–up pulse, 2–16 Configure, 2–8, 3–52 Bright–up pulse, 2–16 Toggling between pages, 3–52 Front–panel switch, 2–11 Toggling between pages, 3–52 Front–panel switch, 2–11 General menu information, 3–31 Rear panel connector, 2–16 General menu information, 3–31 Rear panel connector, 2–16 Measure, 2–8, 3–31, 3–56, 4–1 Power cord options, 6–2 Measure, 2–8, 3–31, 3–56, 4–1 Power cord options, 6–2 Preset, 2–8, 3–31, 3–36 Power switch, 2–3 Preset, 2–8, 3–31, 3–36 Power switch, 2–3 Precision measurement control Precision measurement control (large knob), 2–5 (large knob), 2–5 N Preset menu, 2–8, 3–36 N Preset menu, 2–8, 3–36 Recall, 3–15, 3–36 Recall, 3–15, 3–36 Noise measurement, 4–16 Noise measurement, 4–16 Recover, 3–38 Recover, 3–38 Noise reduction, 4–4, 4–7, 4–12 Noise reduction, 4–4, 4–7, 4–12 Rename, 3–40 Rename, 3–40 Store, 3–39 Store, 3–39 Probe, 2–9 Probe, 2–9 Probe (X1 / X10), 3–54 Probe (X1 / X10), 3–54 Push and hold switches, 2–1 Push and hold switches, 2–1

Index–4 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Index–4 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Index Index

R T R T Readout (ON / OFF), 3–55 Time cursors, 2–5, 3–1 Readout (ON / OFF), 3–55 Time cursors, 2–5, 3–1 Readout intensity adjustment In line select, 2–6 Readout intensity adjustment In line select, 2–6 (vectorscope), 3–46 Set interval, 3–45 (vectorscope), 3–46 Set interval, 3–45 Readout intensity adjustment Touch screen, 2–2, 3–32 Readout intensity adjustment Touch screen, 2–2, 3–32 (waveform), 3–43 Quadrants, 3–32 (waveform), 3–43 Quadrants, 3–32 Rear panel connectors, 2–16 Trace rotation adjustment (vector- Rear panel connectors, 2–16 Trace rotation adjustment (vector- Recall a preset, 3–36 scope), 3–46 Recall a preset, 3–36 scope), 3–46 Recall initial settings, 3–37 Trace rotation adjustment Recall initial settings, 3–37 Trace rotation adjustment Recover function, 3–37 (waveform), 3–43 Recover function, 3–37 (waveform), 3–43 Reference switch (INT / EXT / Reference switch (INT / EXT / CW), 2–12 CW), 2–12 Remote connector, 2–18, 3–15 V Remote connector, 2–18, 3–15 V Remote control, 3–15 Remote control, 3–15 VAR / MAX switch, 2–14 VAR / MAX switch, 2–14 Rename a preset, 3–40 Rename a preset, 3–40 VAR / SLOW switch, 2–13 VAR / SLOW switch, 2–13 RS232, 3–18 RS232, 3–18 VAR / X5 switch, 2–13 VAR / X5 switch, 2–13 RS422, 3–18 RS422, 3–18 Variable gain, 2–13 Variable gain, 2–13 RY sweep measurement, 4–31 RY sweep measurement, 4–31 VECT / SCH switch, 2–11 VECT / SCH switch, 2–11 Vector display (PAL / +V), 3–53 Vector display (PAL / +V), 3–53 S Vector graticule scale, 3–6 S Vector graticule scale, 3–6 Version, 3–55 Version, 3–55 Scale illumination adjustment, 2–3, Vertical gain adjustment Scale illumination adjustment, 2–3, Vertical gain adjustment 3–6 (waveform), 3–45 3–6 (waveform), 3–45 Scale illumination control, 2–3, 3–6 Vertical position control, 2–5 Scale illumination control, 2–3, 3–6 Vertical position control, 2–5 SCH phase measurement, 3–22 Viewing hood (optional accessory), SCH phase measurement, 3–22 Viewing hood (optional accessory), Serial communications, 3–18 6–2 Serial communications, 3–18 6–2 Serial port, 2–18, 3–18 Voltage cursors, 2–6, 3–2 Serial port, 2–18, 3–18 Voltage cursors, 2–6, 3–2 Serial Remote Information, 3–19 Units (mV / IRE), 3–54 Serial Remote Information, 3–19 Units (mV / IRE), 3–54 Service, Extender board kit, 6–2 Zero set, 3–45 Service, Extender board kit, 6–2 Zero set, 3–45 Setup (YES/NO), 3–54 Setup (YES/NO), 3–54 Short–Time Distortion measure- Short–Time Distortion measure- ment (SD), 4–28 W ment (SD), 4–28 W Slow sweep trigger, 3–55 Slow sweep trigger, 3–55 Waveform graticule scale, 3–12 Waveform graticule scale, 3–12 Software version (displayed), 3–55 Software version (displayed), 3–55 WFM / WFM+CAL switch, 2–12 WFM / WFM+CAL switch, 2–12 Sweep rate control, 2–13 Sweep rate control, 2–13 WFM+CAL mode, 2–12, 3–27 WFM+CAL mode, 2–12, 3–27 Sync (AFC or direct), 3–53 Sync (AFC or direct), 3–53 System (B/G or I), 3–53 System (B/G or I), 3–53

1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Index–5 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Index–5 Index Index

X Z X Z X–Y input, 2–16 Zero carrier (ICPM), 4–18 X–Y input, 2–16 Zero carrier (ICPM), 4–18 XY / PIX switch, 2–11 Zero set XY / PIX switch, 2–11 Zero set XY graticule scale, 3–9 Calibrator amplitude, 3–45 XY graticule scale, 3–9 Calibrator amplitude, 3–45 Phase shift (reference set), 2–7 Phase shift (reference set), 2–7 Voltage cursors, 3–45 Voltage cursors, 3–45

Index–6 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual Index–6 1780R-Series Operator’s Manual